You are on page 1of 329

A320 FFS

XR Product
Instructor Operating Station

Instructor User Guide

PROPRIETARY NOTICE: This document, including the information


contained herein, is confidential and/or proprietary to CAE Inc., and
shall not be reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part, or used for
any purpose whatsoever without the prior written authorization of
CAE Inc.

21 Mar 2019 A320Neo-Ceo-1UI-ISS-IUG_Rev1


Contact Information
CAE Inc., 8585 Cote de Liesse, Montreal, Quebec, Canada, H4T 1G6

CAE Inc.
www.cae.com

Customer Services
caextranet.cae.com

Trademarks and/or registered trademarks of CAE Inc. and/or its affiliates include but are not limited to CAE,
CAE & Design, CAE Atmos, Atmos, CAE Exos, Exos, CAE Ionos, Ionos, CAE Lithos, Lithos, CAE Mesos,
Mesos, CAE Stratos, Stratos, CAE Tropos, Tropos, CAE ROSE, ROSE, CAELIB, CAE Medallion, Medallion,
CAE Medallion-S, Medallion-S,CAE Simfinity, Simfinity, CAE ITEMS, ITEMS, CAE RAVE, RAVE, CAE STRIVE,
STRIVE, CAE TIGERS, TIGERS, and ROTORSIM. All other brands and product names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners. All logos, tradenames and trademarks referred to and used
herein remain the property of their respective owners and may not be used, changed, copied, altered, or quoted
without the written consent of the respective owner. All rights reserved.

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


Instructor User Guide
Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions
The following general safety notices supplement the specific warnings and cautions appearing
elsewhere in this manual. These are recommended precautions that must be understood and
applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment covered herein. Should situations
arise that are not covered by safety precautions given, consult the proper local authority.

1. Under no circumstances should a person operate or maintain this equipment without the
immediate presence or assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.

2. Personnel working with or near high voltages must be familiar with modern methods of
resuscitation. In the event of electrical shock, always:

a) Remove power.

b) Administer first aid treatment.

c) Summon assistance.

3. In the event of fire, carry out the procedures provided in your local fire code.

4. All operation and maintenance personnel should be familiar with the location and
function of the emergency shutdown switches. They should also be familiar with the
emergency procedures needed to remove power from damaged equipment.

5. The simulator has voltages that are dangerous and may be fatal if contacted by operation
or maintenance personnel.

6. Do not energize equipment unless safety grounds have been established; failure to do so
may result in electrical shock to the operator.

7. Before starting the motion system, ensure that the area around the simulator envelope is
clear of personnel and that all loose objects are secured.

8. If, at any time, a safety hazard is detected, it is the responsibility of the individual to
report the hazard to ensure it is corrected.

9. All personnel in the flight compartment are to be fastened with seat belts.

10. Do not adjust the seat(s) when the motion system is on.

Safety Precautions
21 Mar 2019
Page i

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


Instructor User Guide
List of Effective Pages

List of Effective Pages


Subject/ Page
Title Nos. Date

Instructor User Guide


Safety Precautions i 21 Mar 2019
List of Effective Pages (this leaf) iii 21 Mar 2019
Table of Contents v-xxiii 21 Mar 2019
List of Figures xxv-xxix 21 Mar 2019
List of Tables xxxi 21 Mar 2019
1 Introduction 1 21 Mar 2019
2 On-board Instructor Station Configuration 3 21 Mar 2019
3 IOS Software Interface 5-15 21 Mar 2019
4 Control Board Workspace 17-19 21 Mar 2019
5 LESSON PLAN Tab 21-24 21 Mar 2019
6 DOCS Tab 25-26 21 Mar 2019
7 CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab 27-46 21 Mar 2019
8 AIRCRAFT Tab 47-93 21 Mar 2019
9 REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab 95-156 21 Mar 2019
10 INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel 157-161 21 Mar 2019
11 Control Board Footer 163-202 21 Mar 2019
12 Maintenance Pages 203 21 Mar 2019
13 INSTRUMENT REPEATER Workspace 205-206 21 Mar 2019
14 Lesson Plan Profile Workspace 207-210 21 Mar 2019
15 Map Workspace 211-236 21 Mar 2019
16 Advanced 237-295 21 Mar 2019

List of Effective Pages


21 Mar 2019
Page iii

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1
2. On-board Instructor Station Configuration............................................................ 3
3. IOS Software Interface ............................................................................................. 5
3.1 IOS Workspaces ........................................................................................ 5
3.2 User Interface (UI) Controls ....................................................................... 6
3.2.1 Sliding Panel ........................................................................... 6
3.2.2 Text Field ................................................................................ 7
3.2.3 Read Only Field ...................................................................... 7
3.2.4 Indicators ................................................................................ 7
3.2.5 Button...................................................................................... 7
3.2.6 Roll-up menu ........................................................................... 7
3.2.7 Wheel Picker ........................................................................... 7
3.3 Selecting Parameters and Entering Data ................................................... 8
3.3.1 Tapping on a Parameter Text Field ......................................... 8
3.3.2 Quick Access Buttons ............................................................. 8
3.3.3 Dropdown Buttons................................................................... 9
3.3.4 Selection Buttons .................................................................... 9
3.3.4.1 Toggle Normal Button ................................................ 9
3.3.4.2 Toggle Fail Button...................................................... 9
3.3.4.3 Action Button ........................................................... 10
3.3.5 Expandable Buttons .............................................................. 10
3.3.6 Radio Buttons ....................................................................... 11
3.3.7 Checkbox .............................................................................. 11
3.3.8 Sliders ................................................................................... 11
3.3.9 Wheel Picker ......................................................................... 12
3.3.10 Keypad .................................................................................. 14
3.3.11 Interactive Graphs ................................................................. 15
4. Control Board Workspace ..................................................................................... 17
4.1 Tabs and Interface Elements ................................................................... 18
5. LESSON PLAN Tab ................................................................................................ 21
5.1 Lesson Outline Section ............................................................................ 23
5.2 Lesson Step Details Section .................................................................... 23
5.3 Lesson Training Phases ........................................................................... 23
5.4 Lesson Steps ........................................................................................... 23
5.5 LESSON PLAN Tab Buttons .................................................................... 24
5.5.1 Autorun ................................................................................. 24
5.5.2 Step-by-step .......................................................................... 24
5.5.3 Go to Current ........................................................................ 24
5.5.4 Skip Condition ....................................................................... 24
5.5.5 Execute ................................................................................. 24
5.5.6 End Lesson ........................................................................... 24

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page v

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

6. DOCS Tab ............................................................................................................... 25


6.1 Thumbnail View........................................................................................ 25
6.2 List View ................................................................................................... 25
6.3 Scroll Up and Down ................................................................................. 25
6.4 Search Function ....................................................................................... 25
6.5 View Expansion........................................................................................ 25
6.6 Zoom ........................................................................................................ 25
7. CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab ................................................................................ 27
7.1 Parameter Input Text Fields ..................................................................... 28
7.1.1 Clouds and Visibility Section ................................................. 28
7.1.2 ASL ....................................................................................... 28
7.1.3 IAS ........................................................................................ 28
7.1.4 Mach ..................................................................................... 28
7.1.5 Heading................................................................................. 28
7.1.6 Icing Conditions .................................................................... 29
7.1.7 Turbulence ............................................................................ 29
7.1.8 A/C Wind ............................................................................... 29
7.1.9 A/C OAT ................................................................................ 29
7.1.10 A/C ISA Dev .......................................................................... 29
7.2 CLOUDS AT AIRCRAFT Sliding Panel .................................................... 29
7.2.1 Visibility Section .................................................................... 31
7.2.2 Cloud Level Section .............................................................. 31
7.2.2.1 High Level Cloud ..................................................... 31
7.2.2.2 Medium Level Cloud ................................................ 31
7.2.2.3 Low Level Cloud ...................................................... 32
7.2.2.4 Medium Level Cloud Thickness ............................... 32
7.2.2.5 Low Level Cloud Thickness ..................................... 32
7.2.3 Fog Section ........................................................................... 32
7.2.3.1 No Fog ..................................................................... 32
7.2.3.2 Patchy Fog and Thickness ...................................... 33
7.2.3.3 Solid Fog and Thickness ......................................... 33
7.2.3.4 RVR Min/Max .......................................................... 33
7.2.4 Weather Presets Section ...................................................... 33
7.2.4.1 CAVOK .................................................................... 33
7.2.4.2 1000/5km ................................................................. 33
7.2.4.3 800/2km ................................................................... 34
7.2.4.4 CAT I ....................................................................... 34
7.2.4.5 CAT II ...................................................................... 34
7.2.4.6 CAT IIIA ................................................................... 34
7.2.4.7 CAT IIIB ................................................................... 34
7.2.4.8 CAT IIIC ................................................................... 34
7.2.4.9 0/0............................................................................ 34
7.2.4.10 MIN T/O RVR .......................................................... 34
7.3 SLEW Sliding Panel ................................................................................. 34
7.3.1 ALTITUDE / SPEED Tab ...................................................... 35

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page vi
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

7.3.1.1 Altitude..................................................................... 35
7.3.1.2 Altitude Slider .......................................................... 35
7.3.1.3 Airspeed .................................................................. 35
7.3.1.4 Airspeed Slider ........................................................ 36
7.3.1.5 Mach ........................................................................ 36
7.3.1.6 Graph....................................................................... 36
7.3.2 HEADING / POSITION Tab .................................................. 36
7.3.2.1 Heading ................................................................... 36
7.3.2.2 Heading Slew Increase (+) / Decrease (-)................ 36
7.3.2.3 Forward ................................................................... 37
7.3.2.4 Back......................................................................... 37
7.3.2.5 Left........................................................................... 37
7.3.2.6 Right ........................................................................ 37
7.3.2.7 Lat / Long ................................................................. 37
7.3.2.8 Hook (Optional)........................................................ 37
7.3.2.9 Position Slew Rate Slider ........................................ 37
7.3.3 Slew ...................................................................................... 37
7.3.4 Discard .................................................................................. 37
7.4 ICING Sliding Panel ................................................................................. 38
7.4.1 Icing Conditions Exist ............................................................ 38
7.4.2 Light ...................................................................................... 38
7.4.3 Moderate ............................................................................... 38
7.4.4 Severe................................................................................... 39
7.4.5 Remove Ice ........................................................................... 39
7.4.6 ICE ACCUMULATION Section ............................................. 39
7.4.6.1 Weight ..................................................................... 39
7.4.6.2 % ............................................................................. 39
7.5 TURBULENCE Sliding Panel ................................................................... 40
7.5.1 CLEAR AIR Turbulence ........................................................ 41
7.5.1.1 CLEAR AIR - Light ................................................... 41
7.5.1.2 CLEAR AIR - Moderate ........................................... 41
7.5.1.3 CLEAR AIR - Severe ............................................... 41
7.5.1.4 Intensity ................................................................... 41
7.5.2 THUNDERSTORM Turbulence ............................................. 41
7.5.2.1 THUNDERSTORM - Light ....................................... 42
7.5.2.2 THUNDERSTORM - Moderate ................................ 42
7.5.2.3 THUNDERSTORM - Severe .................................... 42
7.5.2.4 Intensity ................................................................... 42
7.5.3 LOW LEVEL Turbulence ....................................................... 42
7.5.3.1 LOW LEVEL Turbulence - Light............................... 42
7.5.3.2 LOW LEVEL Turbulence – Moderate ...................... 42
7.5.3.3 LOW LEVEL Turbulence – Severe .......................... 43
7.5.3.4 Intensity ................................................................... 43
7.5.4 Clear All ................................................................................ 43
7.5.5 Turbulence Types Priority ..................................................... 43
7.6 A/C Wind Keypad ..................................................................................... 44
Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page vii

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

7.7 A/C OAT Keypad...................................................................................... 45


7.8 A/C ISA Dev Keypad ................................................................................ 46
8. AIRCRAFT Tab ....................................................................................................... 47
8.1 Parameter Input Text Fields ..................................................................... 48
8.1.1 GW ........................................................................................ 48
8.1.2 GW CG ................................................................................. 48
8.1.3 ZFW ...................................................................................... 49
8.1.4 ZFW CG ................................................................................ 49
8.1.5 Fuel ....................................................................................... 49
8.2 GW Keypad .............................................................................................. 50
8.3 GW CG Keypad ....................................................................................... 50
8.4 ZFW Keypad ............................................................................................ 51
8.5 ZFW CG Keypad ...................................................................................... 51
8.6 Fuel Keypad ............................................................................................. 52
8.7 Quick Access Buttons .............................................................................. 52
8.7.1 DL ......................................................................................... 52
8.7.2 UL ......................................................................................... 52
8.7.3 VHF ....................................................................................... 53
8.7.4 Weight &CG .......................................................................... 53
8.7.5 Services & Doors .................................................................. 53
8.7.6 Malfunctions .......................................................................... 53
8.7.7 Circuit Breakers..................................................................... 53
8.7.8 Fail Summary ........................................................................ 53
8.8 DATALINK (DL/UL) Sliding Panel ............................................................ 54
8.8.1 LOG Tab ............................................................................... 55
8.8.2 NEW UPLINK Tab................................................................. 55
8.8.2.1 GROUPS Section .................................................... 55
8.8.2.2 SCENARIOS Section............................................... 55
8.8.2.3 SCENARIOS (Uplink Messages) Section ................ 55
8.8.2.3.1 Add Button ........................................................... 55
8.8.2.4 Message Editor Section ........................................... 56
8.8.2.4.1 Remove ............................................................... 56
8.8.2.4.2 ▲ and ▼ Buttons................................................. 56
8.8.3 CONNECTIVITY CONTROL Tab .......................................... 57
8.8.3.1 ATC Section ............................................................ 58
8.8.3.1.1 Read-Only Fields ................................................. 58
8.8.3.1.2 Radio Buttons ...................................................... 58
8.8.3.1.3 Disconnect ........................................................... 59
8.8.3.2 ADS Section ............................................................ 59
8.8.3.2.1 Read-Only Fields ................................................. 59
8.8.3.2.2 List of ADS Center IDs ......................................... 60
8.8.3.3 GROUND Section .................................................... 60
8.8.3.3.1 VHF Ground FAULT ............................................ 60
8.8.3.3.2 HF Ground FAULT ............................................... 60
8.8.3.3.3 SATCOM/GES FAULT......................................... 60

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page viii
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

8.9 COMMUNICATIONS Sliding Panel .......................................................... 61


8.9.1 VOLUME Tab ........................................................................ 62
8.9.2 RADIO Tab ........................................................................... 62
8.9.3 INTERCOM Tab .................................................................... 63
8.9.4 NAVIGATION Tab ................................................................. 63
8.9.4.1 Receive .................................................................... 64
8.9.5 SPECIAL FEATURES Tab .................................................... 64
8.9.5.1 Pilot Private ............................................................. 64
8.9.5.2 Copilot Private ......................................................... 64
8.9.5.3 Pilot Monitoring ........................................................ 64
8.9.5.4 Copilot Monitor ........................................................ 64
8.9.5.5 Emergency Call ....................................................... 64
8.9.5.6 MECH Call ............................................................... 64
8.9.5.7 ATT Call................................................................... 65
8.9.5.8 EVAC ....................................................................... 65
8.9.5.9 Mask ........................................................................ 65
8.9.5.10 Hardware ACP ......................................................... 65
8.9.5.11 VHF LOS OVRD ...................................................... 65
8.10 WEIGHT & BALANCE Sliding Panel ........................................................ 66
8.10.1 QUICKSETS Tab .................................................................. 67
8.10.1.1 Light Weight ............................................................. 67
8.10.1.2 Medium Weight ........................................................ 67
8.10.1.3 Heavy Weight .......................................................... 67
8.10.2 PERFORMANCE DATA Tab ................................................ 67
8.10.2.1 Stab Trim ................................................................. 67
8.10.2.2 Flaps ........................................................................ 67
8.10.2.3 V1 ............................................................................ 67
8.10.2.4 VR............................................................................ 67
8.10.2.5 V2 ............................................................................ 67
8.10.2.6 VREF ....................................................................... 67
8.10.3 WEIGHT & CG Tab ............................................................... 68
8.10.3.1 ZFW ......................................................................... 69
8.10.3.2 Fuel.......................................................................... 69
8.10.3.3 GW .......................................................................... 70
8.10.3.4 GW CG .................................................................... 70
8.10.3.5 ZFW CG .................................................................. 71
8.10.3.6 Center of Gravity Limits Graph ................................ 71
8.10.3.7 Left Outer Fuel Tank ................................................ 71
8.10.3.8 Left Inner Fuel Tank................................................. 72
8.10.3.9 Right Outer Fuel Tank ............................................. 72
8.10.3.10 Right Inner Fuel Tank ......................................... 73
8.10.3.11 Center Fuel Tank ................................................ 73
8.10.3.12 Fuel Balance ....................................................... 74
8.10.3.13 Fuel Freeze......................................................... 74
8.10.3.14 Activate ............................................................... 74
8.10.3.15 Cancel................................................................. 74
Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page ix

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.11 SERVICES & DOORS Sliding Panel........................................................ 74


8.11.1 SERVICES Tab ..................................................................... 75
8.11.1.1 Nav Fast Align ......................................................... 76
8.11.1.2 Engine Quick Start ................................................... 76
8.11.1.3 Engine Stagger ........................................................ 76
8.11.1.4 External Air .............................................................. 76
8.11.1.5 Ground Power AC.................................................... 76
8.11.1.6 A/C on Chocks ......................................................... 77
8.11.1.7 A/C on Jacks ........................................................... 77
8.11.1.8 APU Quick Start....................................................... 77
8.11.2 DOORS Tab .......................................................................... 78
8.11.2.1 Aircraft Access Door Buttons ................................... 79
8.11.2.1.1 Close All Doors .................................................. 79
8.11.2.1.2 Avionic Doors..................................................... 79
8.11.2.1.3 Cabin (Forward Left Side) .................................. 79
8.11.2.1.4 Cabin (Forward Right Side) ............................... 79
8.11.2.1.5 Cabin (Aft Left Side) .......................................... 79
8.11.2.1.6 Cabin (Aft Right Side) ........................................ 79
8.11.2.1.7 EMER Exit (Left Side) ........................................ 79
8.11.2.1.8 EMER Exit (Right Side)...................................... 80
8.11.2.1.9 FWD Cargo ........................................................ 80
8.11.2.1.10 AFT Cargo ....................................................... 80
8.11.2.1.11 Bulk Cargo ....................................................... 80
8.11.2.2 SLIDES Section ....................................................... 80
8.11.2.3 FLIGHT DECK ACCESS Section ............................ 80
8.11.2.3.1 Door ................................................................... 80
8.11.2.3.2 Routine Request ................................................ 81
8.11.2.3.3 Emergency Request .......................................... 81
8.11.2.3.4 System Reset .................................................... 81
8.11.2.4 CABIN READY Section ........................................... 81
8.12 MALFUNCTIONS Sliding Panel ............................................................... 82
8.12.1 Status Section ....................................................................... 83
8.12.2 ATA CHAPTER Tab .............................................................. 83
8.12.3 ALPHABETICAL Tab ............................................................ 83
8.12.4 PHASE OF FLIGHT Tab (Optional) ...................................... 84
8.12.5 Activating/Arming a Malfunction ............................................ 84
8.12.5.1 Activate .................................................................... 85
8.12.5.2 Clear ........................................................................ 85
8.12.5.3 Edit Value ................................................................ 85
8.12.5.4 Arm .......................................................................... 85
8.12.5.5 CAUSE & EFFECT Section ..................................... 85
8.12.6 ARMING CRITERIA Sliding Panel ........................................ 85
8.12.6.1 Arm .......................................................................... 85
8.13 CIRCUIT BREAKERS Sliding Panel ........................................................ 87
8.13.1 ATA CHAPTER Tab .............................................................. 88

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page x
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

8.13.2 ALPHABETICAL (A - Z) Tab ................................................. 88


8.13.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS Tab .................................................... 89
8.13.3.1 HARDWARE CB ...................................................... 89
8.13.3.2 SOFTWARE CB ...................................................... 89
8.13.3.3 UNPOWERED Flag ................................................. 89
8.14 FAIL SUMMARY Sliding Panel ................................................................ 90
8.14.1 MALFUNCTIONS Tab........................................................... 90
8.14.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS Tab .................................................... 90
8.14.3 RADIO STATIONS Tab ......................................................... 91
8.15 MALFUNCTIONS Section ........................................................................ 93
8.15.1 Activate ................................................................................. 93
8.15.2 Clear ..................................................................................... 93
8.15.3 Clear All ................................................................................ 93
8.15.4 Tap to Add ............................................................................ 93
9. REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab .................................................................................. 95
9.1 Parameter Input Text Fields ..................................................................... 96
9.1.1 Airport ................................................................................... 96
9.1.2 Runway ................................................................................. 96
9.1.3 Time of the Day ..................................................................... 96
9.1.4 Surface Wind (Mag) .............................................................. 97
9.1.5 Visibility ................................................................................. 97
9.1.6 RVR ...................................................................................... 97
9.1.7 Precipitation .......................................................................... 97
9.1.8 Clouds ................................................................................... 98
9.1.9 Temperature ......................................................................... 98
9.1.10 ISA Dev ................................................................................. 98
9.1.11 QNH ...................................................................................... 98
9.1.12 Microburst/Windshear ........................................................... 98
9.1.13 Runway Condition ................................................................. 99
9.1.14 Interactive Airport Section ..................................................... 99
9.2 AIRPORT & REPOSITION Sliding Panel ............................................... 100
9.2.1 REFERENCE LOCATION Tab ........................................... 101
9.2.1.1 Reference Airport................................................... 101
9.2.1.2 Destination Airport ................................................. 101
9.2.1.3 Change Reference Button ..................................... 101
9.2.1.4 Change Destination Button .................................... 102
9.2.1.5 Auto Reference Location ....................................... 103
9.2.1.5.1 Auto Mode ......................................................... 103
9.2.1.5.2 Manual Mode ..................................................... 103
9.2.2 AIRPORT REPOSITION Tab .............................................. 103
9.2.2.1 HOLD / TAXI Section ............................................. 105
9.2.2.1.1 HOLD ................................................................. 105
9.2.2.1.2 TAXI ................................................................... 105
9.2.2.2 GATE / PARKING SPOT Section .......................... 105
9.2.2.2.1 Gate or Parking Spot Number............................ 106

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xi

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2.2.3 Reposition Presets Section .................................... 106


9.2.2.3.1 Medium Airwork ................................................. 106
9.2.2.3.2 High Airwork ...................................................... 107
9.2.2.3.3 1NM, 3NM LT .................................................... 107
9.2.2.3.4 1NM, 3NM RT .................................................... 108
9.2.2.3.5 T/O ..................................................................... 108
9.2.2.3.6 3 NM Short Final ................................................ 109
9.2.2.3.7 6NM ................................................................... 109
9.2.2.3.8 8NM ................................................................... 110
9.2.2.3.9 12NM, 1 NM LT ................................................. 110
9.2.2.3.10 12NM ............................................................... 111
9.2.2.3.11 12NM, 1NM RT ................................................ 111
9.2.2.4 Runway Lighting Section ....................................... 111
9.2.2.4.1 Runway .............................................................. 111
9.2.2.4.2 Runway Lights ................................................... 112
9.2.2.4.3 Advanced Lighting ............................................. 112
9.2.2.4.4 RUNWAY LIGHTING Sliding Panel ................... 112
9.2.2.4.5 Localizer ............................................................ 115
9.2.2.4.6 Glideslope .......................................................... 115
9.2.3 GROUND OPERATIONS Tab ............................................ 115
9.2.3.1 Ground Operations ................................................ 116
9.2.3.1.1 Marshaller .......................................................... 116
9.2.3.2 Aircraft Pushbacks ................................................. 116
9.2.3.2.1 Tail Left .............................................................. 116
9.2.3.2.2 Straight .............................................................. 116
9.2.3.2.3 Tail Right............................................................ 116
9.2.3.3 A/C on Chocks ....................................................... 117
9.2.3.4 RUNWAY CONDITION Section ............................. 117
9.2.3.4.1 Runway Condition .............................................. 117
9.2.3.5 VISUAL EFFECT Section ...................................... 117
9.2.3.5.1 Record Traffic .................................................... 117
9.2.3.5.2 RECORDED TRAFFIC Sliding Panel ................ 117
9.2.3.5.3 Scenario Traffic.................................................. 118
9.2.3.5.4 SCENARIO TRAFFIC Sliding Panel .................. 118
9.2.4 FMS QUICKSET Tab .......................................................... 119
9.2.4.1 FMS Save .............................................................. 119
9.2.4.2 FMS Recall ............................................................ 119
9.2.4.3 FMS Memory ......................................................... 119
9.2.5 FMS MEMORY SAVE/RECALL Sliding Panel .................... 119
9.2.5.1 MESSAGE Tab ...................................................... 120
9.2.5.1.1 Description ......................................................... 120
9.2.5.1.2 Password ........................................................... 120
9.2.5.1.3 Save .................................................................. 120
9.2.5.1.4 Recall ................................................................. 120
9.2.5.1.5 Cancel................................................................ 121

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xii
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

9.2.5.1.6 Delete Selected ................................................. 121


9.2.5.1.7 Clear all Unprotected ......................................... 121
9.2.5.2 PASSWORD PROTECTED Tab............................ 121
9.2.5.3 UNPROTECTED Tab ............................................ 121
9.2.5.4 Saving a Password Protected Flight Plan .............. 121
9.2.5.5 Saving an Unprotected Flight Plan ........................ 121
9.2.5.6 Recalling a Flight Plan ........................................... 122
9.2.5.7 SIMSOFT CONTROLS Tab ................................... 122
9.2.5.7.1 Save .................................................................. 122
9.2.5.7.2 Recall ................................................................. 122
9.2.5.7.3 Inhibit Auto Recall .............................................. 122
9.2.6 Reposition Button ................................................................ 122
9.2.7 Discard Button .................................................................... 122
9.3 Time of the Day Keypad ......................................................................... 123
9.4 TIME OF DAY Sliding Panel .................................................................. 124
9.5 SURFACE WIND Sliding Panel.............................................................. 125
9.5.1 QUICK SELECTION Tab .................................................... 126
9.5.1.1 H10 ........................................................................ 126
9.5.1.2 H20 ........................................................................ 126
9.5.1.3 H30 ........................................................................ 126
9.5.1.4 T5 .......................................................................... 127
9.5.1.5 T10 ........................................................................ 127
9.5.1.6 T15 ........................................................................ 127
9.5.1.7 L10......................................................................... 127
9.5.1.8 L20......................................................................... 127
9.5.1.9 L38......................................................................... 127
9.5.1.10 R10 ........................................................................ 127
9.5.1.11 R20 ........................................................................ 127
9.5.1.12 R38 ........................................................................ 127
9.5.2 WIND COMPASS Tab ........................................................ 128
9.5.2.1 Runway Wind Components ................................... 129
9.5.2.2 Runway Up ............................................................ 129
9.5.2.3 FAA Gust Backing ................................................. 129
9.5.2.4 FAA Gust Veering .................................................. 129
9.5.3 Reference Airport ................................................................ 129
9.5.4 Wind .................................................................................... 129
9.5.5 Gusting to............................................................................ 129
9.5.6 FAA Gust ............................................................................ 130
9.5.7 Calm Surface Wind ............................................................. 130
9.5.8 Calm All Winds .................................................................... 130
9.5.9 Activate ............................................................................... 130
9.5.10 Cancel ................................................................................. 130
9.6 Visibility Keypad ..................................................................................... 131
9.7 VISIBILITY / RVR Sliding Panel ............................................................. 132
9.7.1 Visibility ............................................................................... 132
9.7.2 FOG Tab ............................................................................. 132
Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xiii

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.7.2.1 None ...................................................................... 132


9.7.2.2 Patchy.................................................................... 132
9.7.2.3 Solid....................................................................... 133
9.7.2.4 RVR Min/Max ........................................................ 133
9.7.2.5 RVR ....................................................................... 133
9.7.2.6 Fog Top ................................................................. 133
9.8 PRECIPITATION Sliding Panel .............................................................. 134
9.8.1 Light Rain ............................................................................ 135
9.8.2 Moderate Rain .................................................................... 135
9.8.3 Heavy Rain ......................................................................... 135
9.8.4 Snow ................................................................................... 136
9.8.5 Hail ...................................................................................... 136
9.8.6 EFFECT Tab ....................................................................... 136
9.8.6.1 Winter Scene ......................................................... 136
9.8.6.2 Blowing Snow ........................................................ 136
9.8.6.3 Blowing Sand ......................................................... 137
9.8.6.4 Lightning & Thunder .............................................. 137
9.9 CLOUDS Sliding Panel .......................................................................... 137
9.10 Ref Temp Keypad .................................................................................. 138
9.11 ISA Dev Keypad ..................................................................................... 139
9.12 QNH Keypad .......................................................................................... 140
9.13 WINDSHEAR & MICROBURST Sliding Panel ....................................... 141
9.13.1 MICROBURST Tab ............................................................. 142
9.13.1.1 Microburst Map ...................................................... 142
9.13.1.2 TAKEOFF PROFILE Section ................................. 142
9.13.1.2.1 New Orleans Accident ..................................... 142
9.13.1.2.2 Tucson in 1977 Denver in 1984 ....................... 143
9.13.1.3 LANDING PROFILE Section ................................. 143
9.13.1.3.1 1975 Kennedy Shear Accident ........................ 143
9.13.1.3.2 Headwind X Wind on Final Approach .............. 143
9.13.1.3.3 Wind Model from Aug 5 Jaws Data .................. 144
9.13.1.4 Description Button ................................................. 144
9.13.1.5 X Position .............................................................. 144
9.13.1.6 Y Position .............................................................. 145
9.13.1.7 Intensity Buttons .................................................... 145
9.13.1.7.1 Light ................................................................. 145
9.13.1.7.2 Moderate.......................................................... 145
9.13.1.7.3 Severe ............................................................. 145
9.13.1.8 Turbulence ............................................................. 145
9.13.1.9 Activate Microburst ................................................ 145
9.13.1.10 Clear Microburst ............................................... 145
9.13.2 PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR Tab......................................... 146
9.13.2.1 TAKEOFF PROFILE Section ................................. 147
9.13.2.1.1 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt ............................. 147

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xiv
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

9.13.2.1.2 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, along with varying


updrafts, downdrafts, and crosswind ..................... 147
9.13.2.1.3 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, along with downdraft
147
9.13.2.2 LANDING PROFILE Section ................................. 147
9.13.2.2.1 Headwind Increasing to XX kt, switching to XXX
kts tailwind, along with varying updrafts, downdrafts
and crosswind ........................................................ 147
9.13.2.2.2 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt ............................. 148
9.13.2.3 X Position .............................................................. 148
9.13.2.4 Y Position .............................................................. 148
9.13.2.5 Intensity Buttons .................................................... 148
9.13.2.5.1 Light ................................................................. 148
9.13.2.5.2 Moderate.......................................................... 148
9.13.2.5.3 Severe ............................................................. 148
9.13.2.6 Turbulence ............................................................. 148
9.13.2.7 Activate Windshear ................................................ 148
9.13.2.8 Clear Windshear .................................................... 148
9.13.3 NON-PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR Tab ............................... 149
9.13.3.1 TAKEOFF PROFILE Section ................................. 150
9.13.3.2 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, triggered as A/C reaches
Vr less X kts on T/O ............................................... 150
9.13.3.3 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, triggered T/O rotation
............................................................................... 150
9.13.3.4 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, along with varying
updrafts, downdrafts, and crosswind, triggered as A/C
climbs through 100 ft AGL on T/O ......................... 150
9.13.3.5 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, along with downdraft,
triggered as A/C climbs through 200 ft AGL on T/O
............................................................................... 151
9.13.3.6 LANDING PROFILE Section ................................. 151
9.13.3.7 Headwind Increasing to XX kt, switching to XXX kt
tailwind, triggered as A/C descends through 1200 ft
AGL during approach............................................. 151
9.13.3.8 Tailwind increasing to XX kt, triggered as A/C
descends through 300 ft AGL during approach ..... 151
9.13.3.9 Intensity Buttons .................................................... 152
9.13.3.9.1 Light ................................................................. 152
9.13.3.9.2 Moderate.......................................................... 152
9.13.3.9.3 Severe ............................................................. 152
9.13.3.9.4 QTG ................................................................. 152
9.13.3.9.5 QTG Flag ......................................................... 152
9.13.3.10 Turbulence ........................................................ 152
9.13.3.11 Activate NP Windshear ..................................... 152
9.13.3.12 Clear Windshear ............................................... 152
9.13.4 Bounce Landing .................................................................. 153
Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xv

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.14 RUNWAY CONDITION Sliding Panel .................................................... 154


9.14.1 CONTAMINATION Tab ....................................................... 155
9.14.1.1 Dry ......................................................................... 155
9.14.1.2 Rubber ................................................................... 155
9.14.1.3 WATER – Patchy ................................................... 155
9.14.1.4 WATER – Wet ....................................................... 155
9.14.1.5 WATER – Standing Water > 1/8 in (3 mm) ............ 155
9.14.1.6 ICE - Patchy .......................................................... 155
9.14.1.7 ICE......................................................................... 156
9.14.1.8 SNOW - Patchy ..................................................... 156
9.14.1.9 SNOW ................................................................... 156
9.14.1.10 SLUSH – ¼ in (6mm) ........................................ 156
9.14.1.11 SLUSH – ½ in (13 mm) ..................................... 156
9.14.2 ROUGHNESS Tab .............................................................. 156
10. INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel ............................................................... 157
10.1 PREFERENCES Tab ............................................................................. 158
10.1.1 Force Units .......................................................................... 158
10.1.2 A/C Weight Units ................................................................. 158
10.1.3 Environment Units ............................................................... 159
10.1.3.1 Metric ..................................................................... 159
10.1.3.2 Imperial .................................................................. 159
10.1.4 Automatic to Reference Airport ........................................... 159
10.2 CONFIGURATION Tab .......................................................................... 159
10.2.1 Change Configuration Button .............................................. 160
10.3 End Session ........................................................................................... 160
11. Control Board Footer ........................................................................................... 163
11.1 FLIGHT FREEZE ................................................................................... 163
11.2 Resets .................................................................................................... 164
11.2.1 Environment ........................................................................ 166
11.2.2 ISA & Winds ........................................................................ 167
11.2.3 Systems .............................................................................. 168
11.2.4 Total .................................................................................... 169
11.2.5 Session ............................................................................... 170
11.2.6 More… ................................................................................ 172
11.2.6.1 RESETS Sliding Panel .......................................... 172
11.2.6.1.1 End Lesson ...................................................... 173
11.2.6.1.2 Crash Inhibit..................................................... 173
11.2.6.1.3 Brake Temp Reset Inhibit ................................ 174
11.2.6.1.4 Environment..................................................... 174
11.2.6.1.5 Standard Atmos & Winds ................................. 174
11.2.6.1.6 Crash ............................................................... 174
11.2.6.1.7 Clear Malfunctions ........................................... 176
11.2.6.1.8 Clear Failed Stations ....................................... 176
11.2.6.1.9 Engine Exceedance ......................................... 176

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xvi
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

11.2.6.1.10 Fuel Used Indicator ........................................ 176


11.2.6.1.11 Air Conditioning ............................................. 177
11.2.6.1.12 Hydraulics ...................................................... 177
11.2.6.1.13 Fuel Temp...................................................... 177
11.2.6.1.14 Engine EGT/ITT ............................................. 177
11.2.6.1.15 Oxygen .......................................................... 177
11.2.6.1.16 Tire Pressure ................................................. 178
11.2.6.1.17 Brake Temp ................................................... 178
11.2.6.1.18 Electrics ......................................................... 178
11.2.6.1.19 Recharge Batteries ........................................ 178
11.2.6.1.20 IDG Connect .................................................. 178
11.2.6.1.21 IDG Oil ........................................................... 179
11.2.6.1.22 Stow RAT....................................................... 179
11.2.6.1.23 Engine Oil ...................................................... 179
11.2.6.1.24 Fire Bottles..................................................... 179
11.2.6.1.25 WTB ............................................................... 179
11.3 Freezes .................................................................................................. 180
11.3.1 Total Freeze ........................................................................ 181
11.3.2 Position Freeze ................................................................... 182
11.3.3 Fuel Freeze ......................................................................... 182
11.3.4 More… ................................................................................ 182
11.3.4.1 FREEZES Sliding Panel ........................................ 182
11.3.4.2 Total....................................................................... 184
11.3.4.3 Flight ...................................................................... 184
11.3.4.4 Altitude................................................................... 184
11.3.4.5 Position .................................................................. 184
11.3.4.6 Heading ................................................................. 184
11.3.4.7 Fuel........................................................................ 184
11.3.4.8 Attitude .................................................................. 184
11.3.4.9 Airspeed ................................................................ 185
11.3.4.10 Link FLT FRZ to Rain Repellent ....................... 185
11.4 Sim Controls........................................................................................... 186
11.4.1 Visual .................................................................................. 187
11.4.2 Motion ................................................................................. 187
11.4.3 Control Loading ................................................................... 187
11.4.4 Prime Smoke ...................................................................... 188
11.4.5 Ceiling Lights ...................................................................... 188
11.4.6 More… ................................................................................ 188
11.4.6.1 SIMULATOR CONTROLS Sliding Panel ............... 189
11.4.6.1.1 MOTION & CONTROL LOADING Tab ............ 189
11.4.6.1.2 MESSAGE LOG Tab ....................................... 189
11.5 Volume ................................................................................................... 190
11.6 Reposition .............................................................................................. 191
11.7 Weather Presets .................................................................................... 192
11.8 Capture Flight......................................................................................... 193
11.9 Print ........................................................................................................ 193
Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xvii

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.9.1 More… ................................................................................ 194


11.9.1.1 PRINT OPTIONS Sliding Panel ............................. 194
11.9.1.1.1 Inverted Mode .................................................. 194
11.10 Speed Up ............................................................................................... 195
11.11 Clear All Malf. ......................................................................................... 195
11.12 Notifications............................................................................................ 196
11.13 Help Rollup Menu................................................................................... 197
11.13.1 Help ....................................................................... 197
11.13.2 Send Feedback ..................................................... 198
11.13.2.1 Send Us Feedback Pop Up .............................. 198
11.13.2.1.1 Keyboard Icon ................................................ 198
11.13.2.1.2 Annotate Screenshots.................................... 198
11.13.2.1.3 Send .............................................................. 198
11.13.2.2 Help Zip File Content ........................................ 200
11.14 Workspace ............................................................................................. 201
11.14.1 Maintenance .......................................................... 202
11.14.2 Instr. Repeaters ..................................................... 202
11.14.3 Lesson Profile ........................................................ 202
11.14.4 Map........................................................................ 202
11.14.5 Control Board ........................................................ 202
11.14.6 Advanced ............................................................... 202
12. Maintenance Pages.............................................................................................. 203
13. INSTRUMENT REPEATER Workspace ............................................................... 205
13.1 Main Section .......................................................................................... 205
13.1.1 INSTRUMENTS Tab ........................................................... 206
13.1.2 Instrument View Mode Section ........................................... 206
14. Lesson Plan Profile Workspace.......................................................................... 207
14.1 Main Section .......................................................................................... 208
14.1.1 Canvas View Mode ............................................................. 208
14.1.2 Lesson Elements................................................................. 208
14.1.3 Runtime Statuses ................................................................ 209
14.1.4 Time Line ............................................................................ 209
14.1.5 List View Mode .................................................................... 209
14.1.6 Time Section ....................................................................... 209
14.1.7 Buttons ................................................................................ 210
14.1.7.1 Lesson List ............................................................ 210
14.1.7.2 List View Mode Show/Hide .................................... 210
14.1.7.3 List View Mode Expand/Collapse .......................... 210
14.1.7.4 End Lesson ............................................................ 210
14.1.7.5 Step-by-Step .......................................................... 210
14.1.7.6 Execute .................................................................. 210
15. Map Workspace.................................................................................................... 211
15.1 Map Header ........................................................................................... 212

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xviii
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

15.2 Main Section .......................................................................................... 213


15.2.1 Icons ................................................................................... 214
15.2.2 Radial Menus ...................................................................... 214
15.2.2.1 Cursor Radial Menu ............................................... 214
15.2.2.2 Aircraft Radial Menu .............................................. 215
15.2.2.3 Navaid Radial Menu .............................................. 215
15.2.2.4 Airport Radial Menu ............................................... 216
15.2.2.5 Storm Radial Menu ................................................ 216
15.3 Right Tool Bar ........................................................................................ 216
15.3.1 Zoom +/-.............................................................................. 217
15.3.2 Auto Range ......................................................................... 217
15.3.3 Scales ................................................................................. 217
15.3.4 Perspective ......................................................................... 218
15.3.5 Map to ................................................................................. 219
15.3.6 Symbols .............................................................................. 220
15.3.7 Indicators ............................................................................ 221
15.4 Map Footer ............................................................................................. 222
15.4.1 Left Side Footer .................................................................. 222
15.4.1.1 Events.................................................................... 222
15.4.1.2 Plots....................................................................... 223
15.4.1.2.1 Precision Approach .......................................... 224
15.4.1.2.2 Non-Precision Approach .................................. 225
15.4.1.2.3 Takeoff ............................................................. 226
15.4.1.2.4 Tail Clearance.................................................. 227
15.4.1.2.5 Runway ............................................................ 228
15.4.1.2.6 Clear Plots ....................................................... 228
15.4.1.2.7 Range (nm) ...................................................... 228
15.4.1.3 Clear ...................................................................... 229
15.4.2 Middle Footer ...................................................................... 230
15.4.2.1 Marker ................................................................... 230
15.4.2.2 Storm ..................................................................... 231
15.4.2.3 STORM PROPERTIES Sliding Panel .................... 231
15.4.2.3.1 Adding a Storm ................................................ 232
15.4.2.3.2 List of Storms ................................................... 233
15.4.2.3.3 TYPE Section .................................................. 233
15.4.2.3.4 ROTATION EFFECTS Section ........................ 234
15.4.2.3.5 Storm Rotation Graph ...................................... 234
15.4.2.3.6 Reposition to Cursor ........................................ 234
15.4.2.3.7 Move with wind ................................................ 234
15.4.2.3.8 Storm Effects ................................................... 234
15.4.2.3.9 Activate ............................................................ 235
15.4.2.3.10 Delete ............................................................ 235
15.4.2.4 Recording .............................................................. 235
15.4.2.5 Print ....................................................................... 235
15.4.3 Right Side Footer ................................................................ 236
15.4.3.1 Latch ...................................................................... 236
Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xix

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.4.3.2 2D/3D .................................................................... 236


15.4.3.3 Help ....................................................................... 236
15.4.3.4 Workspace ............................................................. 236
16. Advanced .............................................................................................................. 237
16.1 Aircraft .................................................................................................... 238
16.2 Position .................................................................................................. 239
16.3 Environment ........................................................................................... 240
16.3.1 WEATHER REGION ........................................................... 241
16.3.1.1 Multiple Weather Airport Conditions ...................... 242
16.3.1.1.1 First Mode ........................................................ 242
16.3.1.1.2 Second Mode................................................... 242
16.3.1.2 Adding a Region .................................................... 242
16.3.1.3 Saving/Recalling Weather Scenario ...................... 243
16.3.1.3.1 Save Scenario ................................................. 243
16.3.1.3.2 Recall Scenario................................................ 244
16.3.1.3.3 Recall Scenario Popup .................................... 244
16.3.2 Windshear & Microburst ...................................................... 244
16.3.3 Icing .................................................................................... 244
16.3.4 Time of Day ......................................................................... 244
16.3.5 Lighting ............................................................................... 244
16.3.5.1 Stop Bar................................................................. 245
16.3.5.2 Taxi ........................................................................ 245
16.3.5.3 City ........................................................................ 245
16.3.6 Airport Visual FX Page ........................................................ 245
16.3.6.1 RUNWAY CONDITIONS Tab ................................ 246
16.3.6.2 VISUAL CONTROL Tab ........................................ 246
16.3.6.2.1 Marshaller ........................................................ 246
16.3.6.2.2 Recorded Traffic .............................................. 246
16.3.6.2.3 Scenario Traffic................................................ 246
16.3.6.3 AIRPORT LIGHTS Tab .......................................... 246
16.3.6.3.1 Stop Bar ........................................................... 246
16.3.6.3.2 Taxi .................................................................. 246
16.3.6.3.3 City .................................................................. 247
16.3.6.4 RUNWAY DEFAULT LIGHTING Tab .................... 247
16.3.6.4.1 Runway Lighting .............................................. 247
16.4 Intruders ................................................................................................. 248
16.4.1 INTRUDERS Page .............................................................. 248
16.4.1.1 TCAS ..................................................................... 249
16.4.1.1.1 INTRUDER POSITION Section ....................... 250
16.4.1.1.2 INTRUDER VERTICAL FLIGHT PATH Section
250
16.4.1.1.3 SCENARIO Section ......................................... 250
16.4.1.1.4 INTRUDER TRANSPONDER EQUIPMENT
Section................................................................... 256
16.4.1.1.5 OWNSHIP CAPACITY LIMITATION ................ 256

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xx
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

16.4.1.1.6 Start Scenario .................................................. 257


16.4.1.1.7 Stop Scenario .................................................. 257
16.4.1.2 Random Traffic ...................................................... 257
16.4.1.2.1 NUMBER OF INTRUDERS Section ................ 258
16.4.1.2.2 ALTITUDE SEPARATION MODEL Section ..... 258
16.4.1.2.3 INTRUDER TRANSPONDER SETTINGS Section
258
16.4.1.2.4 OWNSHIP CAPACITY LIMITATION Section ... 258
16.4.1.2.5 Clear Random Traffic ....................................... 259
16.4.1.3 Approach Traffic .................................................... 259
16.4.1.3.1 NUMBER OF INTRUDERS Section ................ 260
16.4.1.3.2 ALTITUDE SEPARATION MODEL Section ..... 260
16.4.1.3.3 INTRUDER TRANSPONDER SETTINGS ....... 260
16.4.1.3.4 OWNSHIP CAPACITY LIMITATION ................ 261
16.4.1.3.5 Clear App. Traffic ............................................. 261
16.4.1.4 In-Trail Procedure (ITP) ......................................... 261
16.4.1.4.1 PRE-DEFINED SCENARIOS Tab ................... 262
16.4.1.4.2 QUICK SCENARIO Tab................................... 267
16.4.1.5 Number of Intruders Indication .............................. 268
16.4.1.6 Clear All Intruders .................................................. 268
16.5 Comms ................................................................................................... 268
16.5.1 ATIS .................................................................................... 269
16.5.1.1 AIRPORT Tab ....................................................... 270
16.5.1.2 Manual ................................................................... 270
16.5.1.3 Reset ..................................................................... 270
16.5.1.4 Suspend ATIS Transmission ................................. 270
16.5.1.5 Exclude Braking Action .......................................... 271
16.5.1.6 Met Report ............................................................. 271
16.5.1.7 Wind ...................................................................... 271
16.5.1.8 Wind Gust .............................................................. 271
16.5.1.9 Visibility .................................................................. 271
16.5.1.10 RVR .................................................................. 271
16.5.1.11 Weather Type ................................................... 271
16.5.1.12 Clouds............................................................... 271
16.5.1.13 Cloud Base ....................................................... 271
16.5.1.14 Temperature ..................................................... 271
16.5.1.15 Dew Point ......................................................... 272
16.5.1.16 QNH .................................................................. 272
16.5.1.17 Approach .......................................................... 272
16.5.1.18 Arrival Runway .................................................. 272
16.5.1.19 Departure Runway ............................................ 272
16.5.1.20 Runway Condition ............................................. 272
16.5.1.21 Braking Action................................................... 272
16.5.1.22 Remark ............................................................. 272
16.5.1.23 Update Broadcast ............................................. 272
16.5.2 ATC ..................................................................................... 273
Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xxi

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.5.2.1 Clearance Delivery ................................................ 274


16.5.2.1.1 ATC Clears ...................................................... 274
16.5.2.1.2 Flight Number .................................................. 274
16.5.2.1.3 Destination Airport ........................................... 274
16.5.2.1.4 Flight Level ...................................................... 274
16.5.2.1.5 Play .................................................................. 274
16.5.2.1.6 Frequencies ..................................................... 274
16.5.2.1.7 Chatter ............................................................. 274
16.5.2.2 Ground Control ...................................................... 274
16.5.2.2.1 Air Carrier Dropdown Menu ............................. 274
16.5.2.2.2 Flight Number .................................................. 275
16.5.2.2.3 Taxi Route ....................................................... 275
16.5.2.2.4 Contact ............................................................ 275
16.5.2.2.5 Contact - Next Frequency ................................ 275
16.5.2.3 Tower..................................................................... 275
16.5.2.4 Departure............................................................... 275
16.5.2.5 Control ................................................................... 275
16.5.2.6 Approach ............................................................... 275
16.6 Failure .................................................................................................... 276
16.6.1 RADIO STATIONS Page .................................................... 277
16.6.1.1 Reset ..................................................................... 277
16.6.1.2 Fail ......................................................................... 277
16.6.1.3 Cleared Failed Station ........................................... 277
16.6.1.4 Reposition to Station.............................................. 277
16.7 UPRT ..................................................................................................... 279
16.7.1 UPSET RECOVERY Page .................................................. 280
16.7.1.1 DATA SUMMARY Tab........................................... 281
16.7.1.1.1 Critical Parameter Listing ................................. 282
16.7.1.1.2 Thumbnails ...................................................... 283
16.7.1.1.3 Alpha Beta Plot Page ....................................... 284
16.7.1.1.4 V-n Plot Page................................................... 284
16.7.1.1.5 Primary Flight Display (PFD) ........................... 284
16.7.1.1.6 Synoptic Page.................................................. 285
16.7.1.1.7 Quad View ....................................................... 285
16.7.1.1.8 Time History..................................................... 286
16.7.1.1.9 Exceedance Section ........................................ 287
16.7.1.2 CONTROLS Tab.................................................... 287
16.7.1.2.1 Select Scenario ................................................ 288
16.7.1.2.2 Record/Reset ................................................... 288
16.7.1.2.3 Time Range ..................................................... 288
16.7.1.2.4 Review Mode ................................................... 289
16.7.1.2.5 Optional ........................................................... 289
16.7.2 UPRT SCENARIOS Page ................................................... 290
16.7.2.1 MANEUVER BASED ............................................. 291
16.7.2.1.1 WINGS LEVEL ................................................ 291

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xxii
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Table of Contents

16.7.2.1.2 BANK ............................................................... 291


16.7.2.1.3 ALTITUDE ....................................................... 291
16.7.2.1.4 Execute ............................................................ 291
16.7.2.2 SCENARIO BASED ............................................... 292
16.7.2.2.1 INTENSITY ...................................................... 292
16.7.2.2.2 Activate ............................................................ 292
16.8 Resets/Freezes ...................................................................................... 292
16.9 Recording ............................................................................................... 293
16.9.1 FSC/Recall .......................................................................... 294
16.9.1.1 Copy to Stored Captures ....................................... 295
16.9.1.2 Clear All Captures.................................................. 295
16.9.2 FMS Memory Save/Recall .................................................. 295

Table of Contents
21 Mar 2019
Page xxiii

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


Instructor User Guide
List of Figures

List of Figures
1. Introduction
2. On-board Instructor Station Configuration
Figure 1 On-Board Instructor Station (Typical) .............................................. 3
3. IOS Software Interface
Figure 2 Quick Access Buttons (Typical)....................................................... 8
Figure 3 Dropdown Button ............................................................................ 9
Figure 4 Expandable Button ........................................................................ 10
Figure 5 Radio Button ................................................................................. 11
Figure 6 Checkbox ...................................................................................... 11
Figure 7 Slider ............................................................................................. 11
Figure 8 Wheel Picker (Typical) .................................................................. 12
Figure 9 Wheel Picker – Adjustable Parameters (Typical) .......................... 13
Figure 10 Keypad .................................................................................. 14
Figure 11 Interactive Graphs (Typical) .................................................. 15
4. Control Board Workspace
Figure 12 Control Board – Main View ................................................... 17
5. LESSON PLAN Tab
Figure 13 LESSON PLAN Outline and Details ...................................... 21
Figure 14 LESSON PLAN Tab .............................................................. 22
Figure 15 Lesson Step Flags ................................................................ 24
6. DOCS Tab
Figure 16 DOCS Tab ............................................................................ 26
7. CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab
Figure 17 CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab .............................................. 27
Figure 18 CLOUDS AT AIRCRAFT Sliding Panel (Typical) .................. 30
Figure 19 Aircraft SLEW Sliding Panel.................................................. 35
Figure 20 ICING Sliding Panel .............................................................. 38
Figure 21 TURBULENCE Sliding Panel ................................................ 40
Figure 22 A/C Wind Direction Keypad................................................... 44
Figure 23 A/C OAT Keypad ................................................................. 45
Figure 24 ISA Dev Keypad.................................................................... 46
8. AIRCRAFT Tab
Figure 25 AIRCRAFT Tab ..................................................................... 47
Figure 26 GW Keypad........................................................................... 50
Figure 27 GW CG Keypad .................................................................... 50
Figure 28 ZFW Keypad ......................................................................... 51
Figure 29 ZFW CG Keypad ................................................................... 51
Figure 30 Fuel Keypad .......................................................................... 52
Figure 31 DATALINK (DL/UL) Sliding Panel ......................................... 54
Figure 32 NEW UPLINK Tab ................................................................ 56
List of Figures
21 Mar 2019
Page xxv

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 33 CONNECTIVITY Control Tab................................................ 57


Figure 34 ATC Section .......................................................................... 58
Figure 35 ADS Tab ............................................................................... 59
Figure 36 COMMUNICATIONS Sliding Panel (Typical) ........................ 61
Figure 37 VOLUME Tab (Typical) ......................................................... 62
Figure 38 RADIO Tab ........................................................................... 63
Figure 39 WEIGHT & BALANCE Sliding Panel ..................................... 66
Figure 40 Weight & CG Tab .................................................................. 68
Figure 41 SERVICES & DOORS Sliding Panel .................................... 75
Figure 42 SERVICES Tab..................................................................... 75
Figure 43 DOORS Tab.......................................................................... 78
Figure 44 MALFUNCTIONS Sliding Panel ............................................ 82
Figure 45 Malfunctions Status Section .................................................. 83
Figure 46 Malfunction Selection ............................................................ 84
Figure 47 ARMING CRITERIA Sliding Panel ........................................ 86
Figure 48 CIRCUIT BREAKERS Sliding Panel ..................................... 87
Figure 49 Circuit Breakers - Definitions................................................. 88
Figure 50 FAILURE SUMMARY Sliding Panel...................................... 91
Figure 51 AIRCRAFT Tab – MALFUNCTIONS Section ........................ 93
9. REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab
Figure 52 REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab ................................................ 95
Figure 53 AIRPORT & REPOSITION Sliding Panel ............................ 100
Figure 54 REFERENCE LOCATION Tab (Typical) ............................. 101
Figure 55 REFERENCE AIRPORT List (Typical) ................................ 102
Figure 56 AIRPORT REPOSITION Tab (Typical) ............................... 104
Figure 57 RUNWAY LIGHTING Sliding Panel (Typical)...................... 112
Figure 58 RUNWAY DEFAULT LIGHTING Sliding Panel ................... 114
Figure 59 Ground Operations Tab ...................................................... 115
Figure 60 RECORDED TRAFFIC Sliding Panel ................................. 118
Figure 61 SCENARIO TRAFFIC Sliding Panel ................................... 118
Figure 62 FMS QUICKSET Tab .......................................................... 119
Figure 63 FMS Memory Save/Recall .................................................. 120
Figure 64 Time of the Day Keypad ..................................................... 123
Figure 65 TIME OF DAY Sliding Panel ............................................... 124
Figure 66 SURFACE WIND Sliding Panel .......................................... 125
Figure 67 QUICK SELECTION Tab .................................................... 126
Figure 68 WIND COMPASS Tab ........................................................ 128
Figure 69 Visibility ............................................................................... 131
Figure 70 Visibility/RVR ...................................................................... 132
Figure 71 PRECIPITATION Sliding Panel........................................... 134
Figure 72 Ref Temp Keypad ............................................................... 138
Figure 73 ISA Dev Keypad.................................................................. 139
Figure 74 QNH Keypad ....................................................................... 140
Figure 75 WINDSHEAR & MICROBURST Sliding Panel .................... 141
Figure 76 PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR Tab ........................................ 146

List of Figures
21 Mar 2019
Page xxvi
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
List of Figures

Figure 77 NON-PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR Tab ............................... 149


Figure 78 RUNWAY CONDITION Sliding Panel ................................. 154
10. INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel
Figure 79 INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel .............................. 157
Figure 80 Control Board Expand Button ............................................. 158
Figure 81 IOS CONFIGURATIONS Selection Page ........................... 160
Figure 82 IOS Main Page.................................................................... 161
11. Control Board Footer
Figure 83 Footer ................................................................................. 163
Figure 84 Resets Roll up Menu (Typical) ............................................ 165
Figure 85 Systems Reset .................................................................... 168
Figure 86 Total Reset.......................................................................... 169
Figure 87 Session Reset ..................................................................... 171
Figure 88 RESETS Sliding Panel ........................................................ 172
Figure 89 Freezes Roll up Menu ......................................................... 180
Figure 90 FREEZES Sliding Panel ..................................................... 183
Figure 91 Sim Controls Roll up Menu ................................................. 186
Figure 92 SIMULATOR CONTROLS Sliding Panel ............................ 189
Figure 93 Volume Roll up Menu .......................................................... 190
Figure 94 Reposition Roll up Menu ..................................................... 191
Figure 95 WX Presets Roll up Menu ................................................... 192
Figure 96 Print Roll Up Menu .............................................................. 193
Figure 97 PRINT OPTIONS Sliding Panel .......................................... 194
Figure 98 Speed Up Roll Up Menu ..................................................... 195
Figure 99 Notifications ........................................................................ 196
Figure 100 Help Rollup Menu ............................................................... 197
Figure 101 HELP Panel ........................................................................ 197
Figure 102 Send Us Feedback Pop Up................................................. 199
Figure 103 Sending Feedback Pop Up ................................................. 199
Figure 104 Viewing the Feedback Data File ......................................... 199
Figure 105 Help Zip File ........................................................................ 200
Figure 106 Help Zip File Content Example ........................................... 200
Figure 107 Workspace Roll Up Menu ................................................... 201
12. Maintenance Pages
Figure 108 Maintenance Pages ............................................................ 203
13. INSTRUMENT REPEATER Workspace
Figure 109 INSTRUMENT REPEATER Workspace ............................. 205
14. Lesson Plan Profile Workspace
Figure 110 Lesson Plan Profile Workspace .......................................... 207
15. Map Workspace
Figure 111 Map Workspace .................................................................. 211
Figure 112 Map Header ........................................................................ 212
Figure 113 Weight & Balance ............................................................... 212
List of Figures
21 Mar 2019
Page xxvii

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 114 Performance Data ............................................................... 212


Figure 115 Altitude, Heading and IAS ................................................... 212
Figure 116 Communications ................................................................. 213
Figure 117 Malfunctions ........................................................................ 213
Figure 118 Main Section ....................................................................... 213
Figure 119 Main Section Icons.............................................................. 214
Figure 120 Cursor Radial Menu ............................................................ 214
Figure 121 Aircraft Radial Menu ........................................................... 215
Figure 122 Navaid Radial Menu............................................................ 215
Figure 123 Right Tool Bar ..................................................................... 216
Figure 124 Scales ................................................................................. 217
Figure 125 Perspective ......................................................................... 218
Figure 126 Map to ................................................................................. 219
Figure 127 Symbols .............................................................................. 220
Figure 128 Indicators ............................................................................ 221
Figure 129 Left Side Footer .................................................................. 222
Figure 130 Left Events Toggle Menu .................................................... 222
Figure 131 Left Plots Toggle Menu ....................................................... 223
Figure 132 Precision Approach Graphs (Typical) ................................. 224
Figure 133 Non-Precision Approach Graphs (Typical) .......................... 225
Figure 134 Takeoff Graphs (Typical)..................................................... 226
Figure 135 Tail Clearance Graphs (Typical) ......................................... 227
Figure 136 Runway Graph (Typical) ..................................................... 228
Figure 137 Left Clear Toggle Menu ...................................................... 229
Figure 138 Middle Footer ...................................................................... 230
Figure 139 Marker Roll up Menu ........................................................... 230
Figure 140 STORM PROPERTIES Sliding Panel ................................. 231
Figure 141 STORM PROPERTIES –Storm Selected ........................... 233
Figure 142 STORM PROPERTIES –ROTATION & EFFECTS ............. 234
Figure 143 Right Side Footer ................................................................ 236
16. Advanced
Figure 144 Advanced Tool Bar ............................................................. 237
Figure 145 Advanced - Aircraft ............................................................. 238
Figure 146 Advanced - Position ............................................................ 239
Figure 147 Advanced - Environment ..................................................... 240
Figure 148 Advanced – Weather Region (Typical) ............................... 241
Figure 149 Advanced – Adding a Region.............................................. 242
Figure 150 Weather Region – Save Scenario ....................................... 243
Figure 151 Weather Region – Recall Scenario ..................................... 244
Figure 152 AIRPORT VISUAL FX ........................................................ 245
Figure 153 Advanced - Intruders ........................................................... 248
Figure 154 TCAS Page ......................................................................... 249
Figure 155 Random Traffic Page .......................................................... 257
Figure 156 Approach Traffic Page ........................................................ 259
Figure 157 ITP ...................................................................................... 261

List of Figures
21 Mar 2019
Page xxviii
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
List of Figures

Figure 158 ITP Page ............................................................................. 262


Figure 159 Delete Scenario Popup ....................................................... 263
Figure 160 NEW SCENARIO Pages ..................................................... 264
Figure 161 EDIT INTRUDER Page ....................................................... 265
Figure 162 EDIT SCENARIO Page ....................................................... 266
Figure 163 QUICK SCENARIO Tab ...................................................... 267
Figure 164 Advanced - Comms ............................................................ 268
Figure 165 ATIS Page........................................................................... 270
Figure 166 ATC Page ........................................................................... 273
Figure 167 Advanced – Failure ............................................................. 276
Figure 168 Advanced – RADIO STATION Page ................................... 278
Figure 169 Advanced – UPRT Button ................................................... 279
Figure 170 UPSET RECOVERY Page.................................................. 280
Figure 171 DATA SUMMARY TAB ....................................................... 281
Figure 172 Critical Parameters ............................................................. 282
Figure 173 Thumbnails and View Pane ................................................ 283
Figure 174 Quad View .......................................................................... 285
Figure 175 Time History ........................................................................ 286
Figure 176 Exceedances ...................................................................... 287
Figure 177 CONTROLS Tab ................................................................. 287
Figure 178 Recording Markers .............................................................. 288
Figure 179 Review Mode ...................................................................... 289
Figure 180 Optional Markers................................................................. 289
Figure 181 UPRT SCENARIOS Page ................................................... 290
Figure 182 Advance - Resets/Freezes .................................................. 292
Figure 183 Advance - Recording .......................................................... 293

List of Figures
21 Mar 2019
Page xxix

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


Instructor User Guide
List of Tables

List of Tables
1. Introduction
2. On-board Instructor Station Configuration
3. IOS Software Interface
4. Control Board Workspace
Table 1 Control Board Interface Elements ................................................. 18
5. LESSON PLAN Tab
6. DOCS Tab
7. CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab
8. AIRCRAFT Tab
9. REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab
10. INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel
11. Control Board Footer
12. Maintenance Pages
13. INSTRUMENT REPEATER Workspace
14. Lesson Plan Profile Workspace
15. Map Workspace
16. Advanced
Table 2 Parameters Recalled................................................................... 294

List of Tables
21 Mar 2019
Page xxxi

CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page


Instructor User Guide
Introduction

1. Introduction
The Instructor Operating Station (IOS) includes all the tools necessary to control the
simulator training environment and monitor all aspects of crew performance in the
simulator.

This user guide provides information on the standard product instructor station
configuration and IOS System. Features of any particular device may have
differences from the details provided herein.

Before browsing through this guide, please refer to the Simulator Safety Equipment
Manual for all safety related information.

Introduction
21 Mar 2019
Page 1
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
On-board Instructor Station Configuration

2. On-board Instructor Station Configuration


The IOS consists of two touch-sensitive color displays, simulator controls and
accessories, all integrated into a comfortable ergonomic seat, referred to as the
Forward-Facing Instructor Operator Station (FFIOS).

The strategically positioned FFIOS allows for unobstructed visibility on the cockpit,
and easy access to all simulator controls while maintaining optimal ergonomics.

Figure 1 On-Board Instructor Station (Typical)

On-board Instructor Station


Configuration
21 Mar 2019
Page 3
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
IOS Software Interface

3. IOS Software Interface


This user centric designed IOS has a task centric interface that can adapt quickly to
the user’s intended goal, present relevant functionality and required procedures.

This IOS is used to control and monitor training sessions. It provides the instructor
with the tools to:
• Monitor and assess crew performance.
• Monitor and modify aircraft and environment properties and parameters.
• Control the simulator and exercises.
3.1 IOS Workspaces
The IOS Software Interface consists of the following IOS Workspaces:
• Control Board
o Includes all parameters relating to the ownship.
o Is the main access to ownship parameters.
o Allows values to be changed directly on a panel.
▪ For example, adjusting fuel weights.
o Includes sliding panels
▪ For example, to activate and arm malfunctions.
o Includes a common footer
▪ Providing quick access to common commands.
• Map
o Includes elements relating to the environment.
o Features 2D/3D Map viewable modes.
o Includes environment features such as storms, Navaids stations and
simulated intruders or traffic.
o Displays takeoff/approach/runway and aircraft trail and FMS route.
• Lesson Plan Profile
o Includes all elements relating to a lesson.
o Monitors and controls lesson execution.
o Shows the lessons created in the lesson plan editor.
o Allows the instructor to automatically execute a step instead of entering
individual commands.

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 5
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

• Instruments Repeaters
o Allows the instructor to choose which cockpit instrument(s) will be
repeated or displayed on an IOS display screen.
• Maintenance
o Offers pages that allows maintenance personnel to perform various
simulator maintenance tasks.
• Advanced
o Features quick access buttons allowing the instructor to:
▪ Modify Aircraft, Position and Environment parameters.
▪ Perform various types of freeze and resets.
▪ Trigger failures.
▪ Access additional pages

Changing the current IOS workspace is performed through a Workspace button on the
Control Board footer. Tapping this button displays a Workspace rollup menu that
shows all available workspaces.
3.2 User Interface (UI) Controls
The IOS Software Interface includes sliding panels and basic controls that are
common to various workspaces, controls such as:
• Text field
• Read only field
• Indicator
• Button
• Roll-up menu
• Wheel Picker

3.2.1 Sliding Panel


A Sliding Panel is the main type subpage that:
• Is accessible from most workspaces.
• Slides into view from the left-hand side of the screen.
• Slides back out of view by:
o Exercising a left swipe movement, or
o Tapping outside of the sliding panel area.

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 6
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
IOS Software Interface

In a sliding panel, data entry in the text fields are immediately active except in special
instances. Exceptions are noticeable by an action button that will glow to get user’s
attention.

3.2.2 Text Field


To activate a text field:
• Tap or left mouse click on the text field.
• This action displays the appropriate keyboard required for data entry.

3.2.3 Read Only Field


A read-only field provides status and requires no action on the part of the user.

3.2.4 Indicators
Indicators show the state of a component.

3.2.5 Button
To activate a button:
• Tap or left mouse click to activate button.
• Once selected, button illuminates light blue.

3.2.6 Roll-up menu


To activate a roll-up menu:
• Tap or left mouse click to activate.
• Select desired option.
• Tap anywhere to cancel.

3.2.7 Wheel Picker


The Wheel Picker allows the instructor to adjust a parameter on the Control Board.
Refer to paragraph 3.3.9 for details.

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 7
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

3.3 Selecting Parameters and Entering Data


Selecting parameters and entering data on the Control Board or other workspaces is
done by:
• Tapping on a parameter text field
• Quick Access Buttons
• Dropdown Buttons
• Selection Buttons
• Expandable Buttons
• Radio Buttons
• Checkbox
• Sliders
• Wheel Picker
• Keypad
• Interactive Graphs

3.3.1 Tapping on a Parameter Text Field


Tapping on a parameter text field displays either the respective sliding panel or a
keypad.

3.3.2 Quick Access Buttons


Tapping on a Quick Access button displays the respective sliding panel.

Figure 2 Quick Access Buttons (Typical)

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 8
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
IOS Software Interface

3.3.3 Dropdown Buttons


Tapping on a Dropdown button expands the selection for a particular item.

Figure 3 Dropdown Button

3.3.4 Selection Buttons


There are three types of selections buttons:
• Toggle Normal
• Toggle Fail
• Action

3.3.4.1 Toggle Normal Button


A Toggle Normal button has the following states:

Normal State

Activated State

Disabled State

3.3.4.2 Toggle Fail Button


A Toggle Fail button has the following states:

Normal State

Activated State

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 9
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Once a Toggle Fail button is triggered, the fault is recorded by the Control Board and
displayed in Malfunctions sections, Control Board Footer and in the
MALFUNCTIONS sliding panel.

From the red activated state, tap the toggle fail button again to deactivate the
malfunction.

3.3.4.3 Action Button


An Action button has the following states:

Normal State

Activated State (for a few seconds)

Disabled State

The sequence of states of an Action button is as follows:


• Starts in the Normal State.
• Once the instructor taps on the button, button illuminates for a few seconds.
• Then, the Action button returns to either:
o Normal state, or
o Disabled state.

The return to either the Normal state or Disabled state depends on various conditions.

3.3.5 Expandable Buttons


Tapping on an Expandable button displays the associated sliding panel.

Figure 4 Expandable Button

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 10
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
IOS Software Interface

3.3.6 Radio Buttons


Tapping on a Radio button allows the instructor to select only one of the predefined
set of options. These buttons are mutually exclusive.

Figure 5 Radio Button

3.3.7 Checkbox
A checkbox is a toggle feature that selects or deselects a particular item.

Figure 6 Checkbox

3.3.8 Sliders
Sliders can also be referred to as slider controls or scroll bars. These can come in
various forms but they all allow the adjustment of a particular item from a minimum
to a maximum value.

Figure 7 Slider

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 11
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

3.3.9 Wheel Picker


Depending on the configuration of the IOS Control Board, some parameters can be
adjusted with a Wheel Picker. To activate the Wheel Picker for a specific item,
proceed as follows:
• Choose a specific parameter.
• Press and hold on this parameter until the Wheel Picker is displayed or slide this
parameter up or down to display the Wheel Picker.
• Scroll through the selection and select:
o The green checkmark to confirm your selection.
o The red X to cancel your selection.

Depending on the IOS configuration, the following lists some of the parameters that
can be adjusted with the wheel picker are:
• Weight
• Time of day
• Reference airport
• Runway
• Runway conditions
• Surface wind
• Precipitation
• Temperature
• QNH

Figure 8 Wheel Picker (Typical)

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 12
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
IOS Software Interface

Figure 9 Wheel Picker – Adjustable Parameters (Typical)

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 13
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

3.3.10 Keypad
Numerous parameters can be adjusted with a keypad. Entering a value in the keypad
can be done either with the slider or with the keypad keys.

The green checkmark confirms the entry and the red X cancels the entry.

Figure 10 Keypad

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 14
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
IOS Software Interface

3.3.11 Interactive Graphs


Some graphs are interactive and allow the instructor to alter values by simply
touching elements on the graph.

In the Slew graph below for example, the instructor can move the + on the graph
which will cause the sliders and text fields to be updated according to the new +
position on the graph.

Figure 11 Interactive Graphs (Typical)

IOS Software Interface


21 Mar 2019
Page 15
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Workspace

4. Control Board Workspace


The Control Board workspace consolidates all the ownship parameters required to
control and monitor various aspects of a training session. It features a set of tabs that
groups all required ownship and environmental parameters by type.

In this IOS configuration the Control Board workspace includes the following tabs:
• LESSON PLAN
• DOCS
• CURRENT CONDITIONS
• AIRCRAFT
• REFERENCE AIRPORT

The Control Board also includes an INSTRUCTOR STATION sliding panel


accessible by the expand button located at the right side of the Control Board. This
sliding panel allows the instructor to set various Unit of Measures.

Figure 12 Control Board – Main View

Control Board Workspace


21 Mar 2019
Page 17
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

4.1 Tabs and Interface Elements


The interface elements included in each tab of the Control Board are included in this
table.

Table 1 Control Board Interface Elements

Tabs Section Wheel Picker Interface Element

Current
Conditions
Clouds Tap to open sliding panel
Attitude Indicators Tap to open sliding panel
Icing Conditions Yes Tap to open sliding panel
Turbulence Tap to open sliding panel
A/C Wind Text field
A/C OAT/ ISA Dev Text field
Aircraft
GW Yes Text field
GW CG Yes Text field
Fuel Yes Text field
ZFW Yes Text field
ZFW CG Yes Text field
Malfunctions Section showing number of
active/armed malfunctions
Data Link (DL) Tap to open sliding panel
Communications (VHF) Tap to open sliding panel
Weight & CG Tap to open sliding panel
Services & Doors Tap to open sliding panel
Malfunctions Tap to open sliding panel
Circuit Breakers Tap to open sliding panel
Fail Summary Tap to open sliding panel
Reference
Airport
Airport & Runway Yes Tap to open sliding panel
Time of Day Yes Text field
Surface Wind Yes Tap to open sliding panel
Visibility Yes Text field
RVR Yes Tap to open sliding panel
Precipitation Yes Tap to open sliding panel
Clouds Yes Tap to open sliding panel
Temperature / ISA Dev Yes Text field
QNH Yes Text field
Microburst/ Windshear Yes Tap to open sliding panel
Runway condition Yes Tap to open sliding panel

Control Board Workspace


21 Mar 2019
Page 18
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Workspace

Footer
Flight Freeze Button
Resets Button with roll up menu
Freezes Button with roll up menu
Sim Controls Button with roll up menu
Volume 100% Button with roll up menu
Reposition Button with roll up menu
WX Presets Button with roll up menu
Capture Flight Button
Print Button with roll up menu
Clear All Malfunctions Button confirmation – disabled
when no active malfunction, badge
shows number of malfunctions
Notifications Button activates notification view
Help Button with roll up menu
Workspace Button with roll up menu

Control Board Workspace


21 Mar 2019
Page 19
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
LESSON PLAN Tab

5. LESSON PLAN Tab


The LESSON PLAN Tab allows the instructor to:
• View all available lessons on the IOS
• View all the training phases of a lesson
• View all the lesson steps included in a lesson
• Run a lesson automatically or step-by-step

The LESSON PLAN Tab includes:


• Two main sections:
o Lesson Outline (Left side of tab)
o Lesson Step Details (Right side of tab)
• Buttons to control the execution of the lesson

Figure 13 LESSON PLAN Outline and Details

LESSON PLAN Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 21
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

All lessons available on the IOS Control Board are created with the CAE Slick web-
based lesson plan editor (Refer to TPD 19709 Slick User Guide for more details).
This application editor provides all necessary controls to allow an instructor to:
• Create a lesson by adding all the necessary lesson elements:
o Notes
o Simulator condition
o Malfunctions
o Freeplay button
• Modify a lesson

This application editor allows the instructor to add all necessary elements available on
the IOS to create a fully automated training environment lesson.

Figure 14 LESSON PLAN Tab

LESSON PLAN Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 22
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
LESSON PLAN Tab

5.1 Lesson Outline Section


For a selected lesson, the Lesson Outline section lists all:
• Training phases of the lesson.
• All the steps included in each training phase.
5.2 Lesson Step Details Section
The Lesson Step Details section is scrollable; it allows the instructor to scroll up and
down and visualize the details of each lesson step.
5.3 Lesson Training Phases
A lesson plan may be structured and organized in phases that will allow the training
session to meet the training lesson objective(s). Lesson training phases defined by the
instructor can be structured to match the various phases of flight or training tasks.
5.4 Lesson Steps
Lesson steps inserted in a lesson training phase can be categorized as:
• Note
o This a read-only step providing information to the instructor.
• Sim Condition
o This step allows the instructor to execute a single instruction or several
instructions to alter the state of the simulation.
• Malfunction
o This step allows the instructor to insert a malfunction in the lesson plan
along with all the malfunction trigger criteria.
• Freeplay button
o This button allows the instructor to trigger a pre-program action or set of
actions that can be triggered at any time during the lesson plan.
• Nested Lesson
o This step allows the instructor to connect or link to another lesson.

LESSON PLAN Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 23
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

In a lesson plan, these are identified with the following flags:

Figure 15 Lesson Step Flags


5.5 LESSON PLAN Tab Buttons
The LESSON PLAN tab includes the following buttons.

5.5.1 Autorun
Tap this button to run lesson steps that have been set to run automatically.

5.5.2 Step-by-step
Tap this button to run the lesson steps in a step-by-step fashion. For each step to be
issued, requires a confirmation from the instructor which is done by tapping the
Execute button.

5.5.3 Go to Current
Tap this button to display the current lesson step in the Lesson Step Details Section.

5.5.4 Skip Condition


Tap this button to skip a condition associated to specific lesson step.

5.5.5 Execute
Tap this button to execute the current lesson step.

5.5.6 End Lesson


Tap this button to end the current lesson.

LESSON PLAN Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 24
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
DOCS Tab

6. DOCS Tab
The DOCS Tab allows the instructor to view reference documentation. The DOCS
Tab includes the following controls.
6.1 Thumbnail View

Provides a list of small graphic representation of each larger page.


6.2 List View

Provides a list of all the page titles.


6.3 Scroll Up and Down

Scrolls up and down through the document in a Next page, Previous page
fashion.
6.4 Search Function

Allows the instructor to search for a word or a string of characters.


6.5 View Expansion

Expands the view of the viewable document.


6.6 Zoom

Zoom-in and out controls.

DOCS Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 25
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 16 DOCS Tab

DOCS Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 26
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

7. CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


The CURRENT CONDITIONS tab provides an overall status of the aircraft ownship
situation and the environmental conditions at the ownship.

This tab includes all the necessary controls to allow the instructor to view and change:
• Ownship situation parameters such as:
o Altitude
o Airspeed
o Heading
• Environmental conditions at the ownship such as:
o Clouds, fog and visibility
o Icing conditions
o Turbulence
o Winds
o Outside Air Temperature

Figure 17 CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 27
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

7.1 Parameter Input Text Fields


The CURRENT CONDITIONS tab includes parameter input text fields that upon
tapping will display the associated sliding panel or keypad.

Some parameters in this tab can also be adjusted using the Wheel Picker. To use the
wheel picker:
• Press and hold on a parameter until the Wheel Picker is displayed or swipe this
parameter up or down to display the Wheel Picker.
• Scroll through the selection and select:
o The green checkmark to confirm your selection.
o The red X to cancel your selection.

7.1.1 Clouds and Visibility Section


This section of the CURRENT CONDITIONS tab displays the current cloud settings
at a geographic region where the aircraft is flying. Tap on this section to display the
CLOUDS at the aircraft sliding panel.

7.1.2 ASL
This input text field displays the current Above Sea Level (ASL) aircraft altitude. Tap
on this input text field to display the SLEW sliding panel and change the aircraft
altitude.

7.1.3 IAS
This input text field displays the current Indicated Airspeed (IAS). Tap on this input
text field to display the SLEW sliding panel and change the IAS.

7.1.4 Mach
This input text field displays the current Mach speed. Tap on this input text field to
display the SLEW sliding panel and change the Mach speed.

7.1.5 Heading
This input text field displays the current aircraft heading. Tap on this input text field
to display the SLEW sliding panel and change the aircraft heading.

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 28
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

7.1.6 Icing Conditions


This input text field displays the current aircraft icing conditions.

To modify the icing conditions either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the ICING sliding panel, or
• Use the Wheel Picker.

7.1.7 Turbulence
This input text field displays the current turbulence condition at the aircraft. Tap on
this input text field to display the TURBULENCE sliding panel and change the
turbulence condition at the aircraft.

7.1.8 A/C Wind


This input text field displays the current wind direction and speed at the aircraft
(A/C). Tap on the A/C Wind input text field to display the A/C Wind Direction Speed
keypad. Use the keypad to change the wind direction and speed.

7.1.9 A/C OAT


This input text field displays the current Outside Air Temperature (OAT) at the
aircraft (A/C).

To modify the OAT at the aircraft either:


• Tap on A/C OAT to display the A/C OAT keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the temperature or use the Wheel Picker.

7.1.10 A/C ISA Dev


This input text field displays the current International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
Deviation (ISA Dev).

To modify the ISA Deviation at the aircraft either:


• Tap on ISA Dev to display the ISA Dev keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the ISA deviation or use the Wheel Picker.
7.2 CLOUDS AT AIRCRAFT Sliding Panel
The CLOUDS AT AIRCRAFT sliding panel allows the instructor to modify cloud
and visibility parameters at the region around the ownship by choosing:
• The types of clouds at various levels
• Cloud thickness
• Visibility

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 29
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

• Type of fog, and


• Weather presets visual conditions

This panel includes:


• Dropdown buttons to select the types of clouds and cloud density
• Input text fields to enter the upper and lower limits of the cloud layer
• The following sections:
o Visibility
o Cloud levels
o Fog
o Weather presets

Figure 18 CLOUDS AT AIRCRAFT Sliding Panel (Typical)

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 30
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

7.2.1 Visibility Section


This section includes visibility input text fields that display the visibility between
cloud layers.

Maximum visibility is limited if rain is activated:


• 15 nm for light rain
• 5 nm for moderate rain
• 1 nm for heavy rain

To adjust the visibility, tap on the input text field and use the keypad to enter new
value (Min = 0, Max = Dynamic). Can also be displayed in Statute Mile (sm).

7.2.2 Cloud Level Section

7.2.2.1 High Level Cloud


Tap on this dropdown button to expand selection and view the full cloud selection,
then make your selection.

Selection of high clouds includes:


• None
• Cirrocumulus
• Cirrus
• Cirrostratus

7.2.2.2 Medium Level Cloud


Tap on this dropdown button to expand selection and view the full cloud selection,
then make your selection.

Selection of medium clouds includes:


• Clear
• Scattered
• Broken
• Overcast

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 31
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

7.2.2.3 Low Level Cloud


Tap on this dropdown button to expand selection and view the full cloud selection,
then make your selection.

Selection of low level clouds includes:


• Clear
• Scattered
• Broken
• Overcast

7.2.2.4 Medium Level Cloud Thickness


The cloud thickness of the medium level clouds is set by two input text field that
establish the upper and lower limits of the cloud layer.

Tap on the Top ASL input text field to set the cloud top limit and then tap on the Base
ASL input text field to set the lower limit.

Values are displayed in feet. The minimum and maximum cloud layer thickness
depends on the type of coverage.

Note: The input text fields can sometimes be defined as MSL.

7.2.2.5 Low Level Cloud Thickness


The cloud thickness of the low-level clouds is set by two input text field that establish
the upper and lower limits of the cloud layer.

Tap on the Top ASL input text field to set the cloud top limit and then tap on the Base
AGL input text field to set the lower limit.

Values are displayed in feet. The minimum and maximum cloud layer thickness
depends on the type of coverage.

Note: The input text fields can sometimes be defined as MSL and AGL.

7.2.3 Fog Section


The Fog section includes three radio buttons that are mutually exclusive.

7.2.3.1 No Fog
Tap this radio button to remove the fog.

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 32
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

7.2.3.2 Patchy Fog and Thickness


Tap this radio button to activate patchy fog conditions.

When patchy fog is activated, the fog thickness varies randomly between the preset
minimum and maximum Runway Visual Range (RVR) and the altitude set by the
Patchy Fog Top value in ft.

7.2.3.3 Solid Fog and Thickness


Tap this radio button to activate solid fog conditions.

When solid fog is activated, the fog thickness varies between the given minimum and
maximum RVRs. Selection allows inputs ranges of RVR and Top (feet) in the text
field.

7.2.3.4 RVR Min/Max


Tap each input text field to enter the minimum/maximum Runway Visual Range
(RVR) (meters/feet). This button is only available when patchy fog is active.

RVR MIN
(Min = 0, Max = RVR max)

RVR MAX
(Min = RVR min, Max = 3045 meters)
(Min = RVR min, Max = 9990 feet)

7.2.4 Weather Presets Section


This section includes buttons that change the cloud and visibility conditions
according to FAA, EASA, TCA or EUR standards (As applicable).

7.2.4.1 CAVOK
Tap this button to activate CAVOK conditions on the visual display.

Conditions are:
• No cloud base below 5000 feet; no cumulonimbus.
• Visibility 6 statute miles/10 kilometers or more.
• No precipitation, thunderstorms, shallow fog, or low drifting snow.

7.2.4.2 1000/5km
Tap this button to activate CIRCLING with 1000/5km conditions on the visual
display.

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 33
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

7.2.4.3 800/2km
Tap this button to activate CIRCLING with 800/2km conditions on the visual display.

7.2.4.4 CAT I
Tap this button to activate CAT I conditions on the visual display.

7.2.4.5 CAT II
Tap this button to activate CAT II conditions on the visual display.

7.2.4.6 CAT IIIA


Tap this button to activate CAT IIIA conditions on the visual display.

7.2.4.7 CAT IIIB


Tap this button to activate CAT IIIB conditions on the visual display.

7.2.4.8 CAT IIIC


Tap this button to activate CAT IIIC conditions on the visual display.

7.2.4.9 0/0
Tap this button to activate 0/0 conditions on the visual display.

7.2.4.10 MIN T/O RVR


Tap to activate MIN T/O RVR conditions on the visual display.
7.3 SLEW Sliding Panel
The SLEW sliding panel allows the instructor to view and change the aircraft:
• Altitude
• Indicated airspeed
• Heading and position

Position slew is possible when position freeze is activated. Below 100 feet above
ground level, the aircraft height above ground will be maintained as the position is
slewed. Altitude and speed slew are inhibited while the aircraft is on ground.

This sliding panel includes two main tabs:


• ALTITUDE/SPEED
• HEADING/POSITION

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 34
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

Figure 19 Aircraft SLEW Sliding Panel

7.3.1 ALTITUDE / SPEED Tab


This tab includes the necessary controls to modify the altitude and airspeed of the
aircraft.

7.3.1.1 Altitude
Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow you to enter a new altitude
(meters/feet).

Modifying the altitude can be done either through the altitude input text field or with
the Altitude slider. (Dynamic Min/Max).

7.3.1.2 Altitude Slider


Swipe the Altitude slider up (+) or down (-) to increase or decrease the aircraft
altitude (Dynamic Min/Max).

The + button slews the aircraft upwards at a fixed rate and the – button slews the
aircraft downwards at a fixed rate.

7.3.1.3 Airspeed
Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow you to enter a new
Indicated Airspeed (IAS) in knots.

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 35
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Modifying the IAS can be done either through the airspeed input text field or with the
Airspeed slider. (Dynamic Min/Max).

The aircraft is trimmed at the requested speed. Flap and gear position will be driven
as required in order not to create an overspeed condition. Flight freeze is set once
complete. (Dynamic Min/Max).

7.3.1.4 Airspeed Slider


Swipe the Airspeed slider right (+) or left (-) to increase or decrease the aircraft
speed.

The aircraft is trimmed at the requested speed. Flap and gear position will be driven
as required in order not to create an overspeed condition. Flight freeze is set once
complete (Dynamic Min/Max).

The + button slews the aircraft indicated airspeed up at a fixed rate and the – button
slews the aircraft indicated airspeed down at a fixed rate.

7.3.1.5 Mach
Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow you to enter a new aircraft
Mach speed.

The aircraft is trimmed at the requested Mach speed. Flap and gear position will be
driven as required in order not to create an overspeed condition. Flight freeze is set
once complete (Dynamic Min/Max).

7.3.1.6 Graph
This graph is interactive as it allows the instructor to alter values by simply touching
elements on the graph.

In this Slew graph, the instructor can move the + on the graph which will cause the
sliders and text fields to be updated according to the new + position on the graph.

7.3.2 HEADING / POSITION Tab


This tab includes the necessary controls to modify the heading and position of the
aircraft.

7.3.2.1 Heading
Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow you to enter a new aircraft
heading. No other parameters are affected.

7.3.2.2 Heading Slew Increase (+) / Decrease (-)


The heading (+) button or (–) button slew the aircraft magnetic heading either by
increasing or decreasing it a fixed rate. These buttons are disabled when the magnetic
aircraft heading slew function is not available.

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 36
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

7.3.2.3 Forward
Tap this button to slew the aircraft forward. This button is disabled during speed up.

7.3.2.4 Back
Tap this button to slew the aircraft backwards. This button is disabled during speed
up.

7.3.2.5 Left
Tap this button to slew the aircraft to the left. This button is disabled during speed up.

7.3.2.6 Right
Tap this button to slew the aircraft to the right. This button is disabled during speed
up.

7.3.2.7 Lat / Long


Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow you to enter new latitude
and longitude coordinates for the aircraft (ownship). This input text field allows the
instructor to reposition the aircraft at a new location.

7.3.2.8 Hook (Optional)

Tap the Hook button to position the aircraft to the preset Hook geo coordinates
as set by the instructor on the Map workspace. This geographic point has Latitude and
longitude coordinates on the map but it does not have an altitude.

7.3.2.9 Position Slew Rate Slider


Swipe the Position Slew Rate Slider between 1 to 5 to change the rate at which the
slews will function (Min = 1, Max = 5).

7.3.3 Slew
Tap this button to immediately slew the aircraft in accordance with the newly
changed parameters (altitude, speed, heading and position).

This button is disabled when no slew parameters have been selected for change or
while one of the associated slews is active.

7.3.4 Discard
Tap this button to immediately cancel the slew selected parameter changes.

This button is disabled when no slew parameters have been selected for change or
while one of the associated slews is active.

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 37
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

7.4 ICING Sliding Panel


The ICING sliding panel allows the instructor to control the icing conditions on the
aircraft. The selection of icing conditions on the aircraft is done by selecting either
one of the Light, Moderate or Severe buttons which are mutually exclusive.

Figure 20 ICING Sliding Panel

7.4.1 Icing Conditions Exist


There are two flags to indicate the selection of an icing condition.

An Armed Yellow flag indicates:


• That an icing condition is selected
• The aircraft is not in the icing condition location (not in cloud)
• TAT <6 and >-20 degree Celsius

An Active Red flag indicates:


• That an icing condition is selected
• The aircraft is in the icing condition location (in cloud)
• TAT <6 and >-20 degree Celsius

7.4.2 Light
From the Normal state, tap this button to set the rate and quantity of ice buildup on
the airframe/wing/probe to the light setting (33%).

7.4.3 Moderate
From the Normal state, tap this button to set the rate and quantity of ice buildup on
the airframe/wing/probe to the moderate setting (67%).

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 38
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

7.4.4 Severe
From the Normal state, tap this button to set the rate and quantity of ice buildup on
the airframe/wing/probe to the severe setting (100%).

7.4.5 Remove Ice


Tap this button to gradually remove the existing ice buildup condition. Once
completed the icing rate and quantity is set to 0.

7.4.6 ICE ACCUMULATION Section


This section includes read-only text fields that display ice accumulation in weight or
% for certain aircraft components.

7.4.6.1 Weight
The weight read-only text fields display the actual ice accumulation weight in the
selected unit of measure (kilograms/pounds) for the following aircraft components:
• Airframe
• ENG #1
• ENG #2
• Left Wing
• Right Wing
• Tail
• Total Mass

7.4.6.2 %
The % read-only text fields display the actual ice accumulation percentage for the
following aircraft components:
• Airframe
• ENG #1
• ENG #2
• Left Wing
• Right Wing
• Tail
• Total Mass

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 39
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

7.5 TURBULENCE Sliding Panel


The TURBULENCE sliding panel allows the instructor to select various types of
turbulence that can be induced on the aircraft.

This sliding panel offers buttons that are mutually exclusive and allow the instructor
to manually change various turbulence parameters such as:
• Type and,
• Intensity level

It includes the following sections:


• CLEAR AIR
• THUNDERSTORM
• LOW LEVEL

Figure 21 TURBULENCE Sliding Panel

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 40
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

7.5.1 CLEAR AIR Turbulence


Clear air turbulence can be felt at all altitudes, except while on ground.

At altitudes below 50 ft AGL, the nominal turbulence intensity is faded linearly as a


function of altitude AGL.

At altitudes above 50 ft AGL, 100% of the nominal turbulence intensity is felt.

Altitude ft Clear Air


>10,000 100%
5,000-10,000 100%
500-5,000 100%
<50 Fades linear

7.5.1.1 CLEAR AIR - Light


Tap this button to set the clear air turbulence intensity to light (33%).

7.5.1.2 CLEAR AIR - Moderate


Tap this button to set the clear air turbulence intensity to moderate (66%).

7.5.1.3 CLEAR AIR - Severe


Tap this button to set the clear air turbulence intensity to severe (100%).

7.5.1.4 Intensity
Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow you to modify the intensity
level of the clear air turbulence (Min = 0, Max = 100%).

7.5.2 THUNDERSTORM Turbulence


Thunderstorm turbulence can be felt at all altitudes, except while on ground.

At altitudes below 50 ft AGL, the nominal turbulence intensity is faded linearly as a


function of altitude AGL.

At altitudes above 50 ft AGL, 100% of the nominal turbulence intensity is felt.

Altitude ft Thunderstorm
>10,000 100%
5,000-10,000 100%
500-5,000 100%
<50 Fades linear

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 41
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

7.5.2.1 THUNDERSTORM - Light


Tap this button to set the thunderstorm turbulence intensity to light (33%).

7.5.2.2 THUNDERSTORM - Moderate


Tap this button to set the thunderstorm turbulence intensity to moderate (66%).

7.5.2.3 THUNDERSTORM - Severe


Tap this button to set the thunderstorm turbulence intensity to severe (100%).

7.5.2.4 Intensity
Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow you to modify the intensity
level of the thunderstorm turbulence (Min = 0, Max = 100%).

7.5.3 LOW LEVEL Turbulence


Low level turbulence is only felt at certain altitudes.

At altitudes above 500 ft AGL and below 5000 ft AGL, 100% of the nominal low
level turbulence intensity is felt.

At altitudes above 10,000 ft AGL, low level turbulence is not felt.

At altitudes between 5,000 ft AGL and 10000 ft AGL, the nominal turbulence
intensity is linearly faded as a function of altitude AGL.

At altitudes above 50 ft AGL and below 500 ft AGL, the nominal turbulence intensity
is exponentially faded as a function of altitude AGL.

At altitudes below 50 ft AGL, the nominal turbulence intensity is linearly faded as a


function of altitude AGL. Low level turbulence is not felt while on the ground.

Altitude ft Low Level


>10,000 None
5000-10,000 Fades linear
500-5,000 Fades
exponentially
<50 Ground

7.5.3.1 LOW LEVEL Turbulence - Light


Tap this button to set the low-level turbulence intensity to light (33%).

7.5.3.2 LOW LEVEL Turbulence – Moderate


Tap this button to set the low-level turbulence intensity to moderate (66%).

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 42
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

7.5.3.3 LOW LEVEL Turbulence – Severe


Tap this button to set the low-level turbulence intensity to severe (100%).

7.5.3.4 Intensity
Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow you to modify the intensity
level of the low-level turbulence (Min = 0, Max = 100%).

7.5.4 Clear All


Tap this button to clear all active turbulence types from the environment.

7.5.5 Turbulence Types Priority


Tap this expandable button to display the TURBULENCE TYPES PRIORITY
Sliding Panel.

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 43
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

7.6 A/C Wind Keypad


The A/C Wind keypad displays the current wind direction and speed at the aircraft
location.

To change the A/C wind direction and speed at the aircraft location:
1) Use the keypad or the slider control to enter a new magnetic wind direction and
speed at the aircraft.
2) Tap on the green checkmark to confirm your selection or the red X to cancel
the entry.

The wind direction varies between 1° to 360°.

If flight freeze is not active, a change to A/C wind direction and speed is immediately
ramped, at a pre-determined rate, to the requested value.

If flight freeze is active, a change to the A/C wind direction and speed is delayed until
flight freeze is released.

Figure 22 A/C Wind Direction Keypad

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 44
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab

7.7 A/C OAT Keypad


The A/C OAT keypad displays the current Outside Air Temperature (OAT) at the
aircraft location.

To change the A/C OAT at the aircraft location:


1) Use the keypad or the slider control to enter a new OAT at the aircraft.
2) Tap on the green checkmark to confirm your selection or the red X to cancel
the entry.

The entire temperature profile will be offset by the change in the OAT (Dynamic
Min/Max).

If the aircraft is on the ground, the OAT change is instantaneous regardless of flight
freeze.

If the aircraft is in the air and flight freeze is not active, a change to OAT is
immediately ramped, at a pre-determined rate, to the requested value.

If the aircraft is in the air and flight freeze is active, a change to OAT is delayed until
flight freeze is released.

The advisory message, Temperature is Changing, will appear in the warning footer
area of the IOS until the change is completed. The ramped OAT reading will be
indicated on the IOS while the new value is reached.

Figure 23 A/C OAT Keypad

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 45
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

7.8 A/C ISA Dev Keypad


The A/C ISA Dev keypad displays the current ISA temperature deviation at the
aircraft location.

To change the ISA temperature deviation at the aircraft location:


1) Use the keypad to enter a new ISA deviation at the aircraft.
2) Tap on the green checkmark to confirm your selection or the red X to cancel
the entry.

Figure 24 ISA Dev Keypad

CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 46
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8. AIRCRAFT Tab
The AIRCRAFT Tab allows the instructor to:
• Quickly set aircraft initial conditions
• Control and monitor aircraft parameters such as:
o Weight and balance
o Fuel Tank quantities
o Data Link (DL)
• Control and monitor communication and navigation radios
• Open and close aircraft doors and access service panels
• Carry out certain ground service operations
• Monitor aircraft conditions
• Trigger malfunctions
• Trip/pop circuit breakers

This tab features input text fields and quick access buttons to quickly access sliding
panels and keypads and change aircraft parameters.

Figure 25 AIRCRAFT Tab

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 47
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.1 Parameter Input Text Fields


The AIRCRAFT tab includes parameter input text fields that upon tapping will
display the associated keypad.

Some parameters in this tab can also be adjusted using the Wheel Picker. To use the
wheel picker:
• Press and hold on a parameter until the Wheel Picker is displayed or swipe this
parameter up or down to display the Wheel Picker.
• Scroll through the selection and select:
o The green checkmark to confirm your selection.
o The red X to cancel your selection.

8.1.1 GW
This input text field displays the aircraft Gross Weight (GW) in the selected unit
(kilograms/pounds x1000).

To modify the aircraft GW either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the GW keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the aircraft Gross Weight or use the Wheel Picker.

Selection of a new Gross Weight is achieved with appropriate change in Zero Fuel
Weight (ZFW). If new Zero Fuel Weight is outside limits identified by approved data,
then fuel weight is also adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

8.1.2 GW CG
This input text field displays the Gross Weight Center of Gravity (GW CG) in %
MAC.

To modify the aircraft GW CG either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the GW CG keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the GW CG or use the Wheel Picker:

Selection of a new aircraft Center of Gravity is achieved with appropriate change in


Zero Fuel Weight Center of Gravity.

If new Zero Fuel Weight Center of Gravity is outside limits identified by approved
data, then the fuel weight is reduced and the Zero Fuel Weight is increased as
required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 48
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.1.3 ZFW
This input text field displays the aircraft Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) in the selected unit
(kilograms/pounds x1000).

To modify the aircraft ZFW either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the ZFW keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the ZFW or use the Wheel Picker.

Selection of a new Zero Fuel Weight is achieved with appropriate change in Gross
Weight.

If a new gross weight is outside limits identified by approved data, then fuel weight is
also adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

8.1.4 ZFW CG
This input text field displays the Zero Fuel Weight Center of Gravity (ZFW CG) in %
MAC.

To modify the aircraft ZFW CG either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the ZFW CG keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the ZFW CG or use the Wheel Picker.

Selection of a new Zero Fuel Weight Center of Gravity is achieved with appropriate
change in aircraft center of gravity.

8.1.5 Fuel
This input text field displays the aircraft total fuel in the selected unit
(kilograms/pounds x1000).

To modify the aircraft total fuel weight either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the Fuel keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the aircraft total fuel quantity or use the Wheel
Picker.

Fuel is distributed in accordance with the aircraft fuel distribution schedule.

Selection of a new fuel weight is achieved with appropriate change in Gross Weight.

If a new Gross Weight is outside limits identified by approved data, then Zero Fuel
Weight is also adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 49
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.2 GW Keypad
The GW keypad displays the current Gross Weight and allows the instructor to enter
another GW value either through the keypad or the slider.

Figure 26 GW Keypad
8.3 GW CG Keypad
The GW CG keypad displays the current Gross Weight Center of Gravity (GW CG)
and allows the instructor to enter another GW CG value either through the keypad or
the slider.

Figure 27 GW CG Keypad

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 50
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.4 ZFW Keypad


The ZFW keypad displays the current Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) and allows the
instructor to enter another ZFW value either through the keypad or the slider.

Figure 28 ZFW Keypad


8.5 ZFW CG Keypad
The ZFW CG keypad displays the current Zero Fuel Weight Center of Gravity (ZFW
CG) and allows the instructor to enter another ZFW CG value either through the
keypad or the slider.

Figure 29 ZFW CG Keypad

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 51
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.6 Fuel Keypad


The Fuel keypad displays the current fuel weight and allows the instructor to enter
another fuel weight value either through the keypad or the slider.

Figure 30 Fuel Keypad


8.7 Quick Access Buttons
The AIRCRAFT tab includes quick access buttons that upon tapping will display the
associated sliding panel.

8.7.1 DL
This button displays the Datalink (DL) status. When the datalink log has incoming
downlink messages from the crew, this button illuminates green.

Tap this button to display the DATALINK sliding panel.

8.7.2 UL
This button displays the Uplink (UL) status. When the datalink log has uplink
messages sent from instructor ground operation roleplay to crew, this button
illuminates orange.

Tap this button to display the DATALINK sliding panel.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 52
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.7.3 VHF
This button displays:
• The status of the pilot and copilot radio communication.
• The radio transmission frequencies tuned by the pilot and copilot.

When a crew member speaks, green emitting waves are displayed next to pilot/copilot
icons.

Tap this button to display the COMMUNICATIONS sliding panel.

8.7.4 Weight &CG


Tap this button to display the WEIGHT & BALANCE sliding panel.

8.7.5 Services & Doors


Tap this button to display the SERVICES & DOORS sliding panel.

8.7.6 Malfunctions
Tap this button to display the MALFUNCTIONS sliding panel. A red badge on this
quick access button indicates the number of active and armed malfunctions.

8.7.7 Circuit Breakers


Tap this button to display the CIRCUIT BREAKERS sliding panel. A red badge on
this quick access button indicates the number of circuit breakers that are
tripped/popped.

8.7.8 Fail Summary


Tap this button to display the FAIL SUMMARY sliding panel. A red badge on this
quick access button indicates the number failures included in the FAIL SUMMARY
sliding panel.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 53
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.8 DATALINK (DL/UL) Sliding Panel


The DATALINK sliding panel allows the instructor to:
• Uplink messages to the simulated aircraft
• Show communication between the simulated aircraft and the simulated ground
station
• Review and reply to messages from the simulated aircraft
• Control connections of:
o Air Traffic Controller (ATC)
o Automatic Dependent Surveillance (ADS)
• Trigger various ground station datalink failures

This sliding panel includes two tabs:


• LOG
• CONNECTIVITY CONTROL

Figure 31 DATALINK (DL/UL) Sliding Panel

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 54
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.8.1 LOG Tab


The LOG tab displays a history of communication between the simulated aircraft and
the simulated ground station, where the latest message is always displayed at the top
of the page.

This Tab includes the following buttons:

Clear One Tap this button to clear the oldest message from the log. The
oldest message is located at the bottom of the history log.

Clear All Tap this button to clear all logged messages in the DATALINK
LOG Tab.

Send Uplink Tap this message box to display the NEW UPLINK tab.

8.8.2 NEW UPLINK Tab


The NEW UPLINK Tab allows the instructor to send uplink messages. This tab
includes the following sections:
• GROUPS
• SCENARIOS
• SCENARIOS
• Message Editor

8.8.2.1 GROUPS Section


This section lists all the various groups of scenarios for which uplink messages exist.
Tap on one of the GROUPS button to make your selection.

8.8.2.2 SCENARIOS Section


This section lists all the various uplink message categories within a selected group.
Tap on one of the scenarios button to view the available uplink messages for the
selected category.

8.8.2.3 SCENARIOS (Uplink Messages) Section


This section lists all the available uplink messages for the selected scenario (category)

8.8.2.3.1 Add Button


Tap the Add button next to an uplink message to add this uplink message into the
Message editor section.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 55
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.8.2.4 Message Editor Section


This section shows the selected uplink messages and includes the controls to allow
the instructor to set parameters such as time and altitude as well as control the order
in which messages are sent to the crew.

8.8.2.4.1 Remove
Tap the Remove button within an uplink message, removes the uplink message from
the Message editor section.

8.8.2.4.2 ▲ and ▼ Buttons


Tap the ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the message priority within the Message Editor
section. The message priority within this box is the order in which messages will be
sent the crew.

Figure 32 NEW UPLINK Tab

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 56
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.8.3 CONNECTIVITY CONTROL Tab


The CONNECTIVITY CONTROL Tab provides the controls to connect/disconnect
to ATC and ADS centers and displays Ground Communication status.

This tab includes the following sections:


• ATC
• ADS
• GROUND

Figure 33 CONNECTIVITY Control Tab

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 57
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.8.3.1 ATC Section


This section mainly consists of ready only fields and radio buttons.

Figure 34 ATC Section

8.8.3.1.1 Read-Only Fields


The read-only fields display the current ATC connection flight number, active ATC
ID and Next authority ID.

8.8.3.1.2 Radio Buttons


There are three mutually exclusive radio buttons to select the next data authority.

Automatic ATC Management Tap this radio button to activate the Automatic
ATC Management mode. In this mode, the data
authority transfer is handled by the ground station
simulation which requires no action from the
instructor.

Automatic Pre-selection Tap this button to activate the Automatic Pre-


Selection mode. In this mode, the next data
authority is suggested by the software but the
transfer must be initiated by the instructor by
taping the Send button.

Manual Selection Tap this button to activate the Manual Selection


mode. In this mode, the next data authority must
be selected by the instructor through the Display
input text field. Once the next data authority
selected, tap on the Send button to initiate the
transfer.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 58
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.8.3.1.3 Disconnect
Tap this button to disconnect the current active ATC connection. Tapping this button
displays a pop menu to confirm the disconnect.

8.8.3.2 ADS Section


The Automatic Dependent Surveillance (ADS) section displays ADS information and
controls the ADS connections. This section includes read-only fields and a list of
ADS center IDs.

Figure 35 ADS Tab

8.8.3.2.1 Read-Only Fields


The read-only fields display the partial content of the last received ADS report.
• Aircraft ID
• Latitude
• Longitude
• Altitude
• ADS Basic Report Mode

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 59
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.8.3.2.2 List of ADS Center IDs


This portion of the ADS section lists all the ADS Center IDs with associated controls.

ID Displays the ADS Center ID.

Report Interval Displays the ADS reporting interval.

Modify Tap this button to modify the ADS reporting


interval.

Status Displays the status of the ADS connection.

Connect/Disconnect Tap this button to initiate the ADS connection or


the ADS disconnect.

8.8.3.3 GROUND Section


This section provides a status of ground communication and allows the instructor to
trigger communication failures. This section includes the following buttons.

8.8.3.3.1 VHF Ground FAULT


From the Normal state, tap this toggle fail button to trigger a datalink communication
failure with the VHF ground station.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle fail button to clear the failure and return to
the Normal state.

8.8.3.3.2 HF Ground FAULT


From the Normal state, tap this toggle fail button to trigger a datalink communication
failure with the HF ground station.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle fail button to clear the failure and return to
the Normal state.

8.8.3.3.3 SATCOM/GES FAULT


From the Normal state, tap this toggle fail button to trigger a datalink communication
failure with the SATCOM ground station.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle fail button to clear the failure and return to
the Normal state.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 60
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.9 COMMUNICATIONS Sliding Panel


The COMMUNICATIONS sliding panel allows the instructor to:
• Establish:
o VHF and HF radio communications
o Communication with Inter Communication Systems (ICS)
• Listen to radio navigation signals
• Select various communication modes

This sliding panel provides controls to change any audio monitor, instructor transmit,
crew transmit or calls controls. It includes the following tabs:
• VOLUME
• RADIO
• INTERCOM
• NAVIGATION
• SPECIAL FEATURES

Figure 36 COMMUNICATIONS Sliding Panel (Typical)

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 61
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.9.1 VOLUME Tab


The VOLUME tab allows the instructor to control the volume level of audio signals
through slider controls. There are several sliders to control:
• Radio/Intercom headphone audio
• Navigation audio signal
• Headset audio
• Bkg Noise

Each volume sliding control can vary the volume from a minimum value to a
maximum value.

Figure 37 VOLUME Tab (Typical)

8.9.2 RADIO Tab


The RADIO tab allows the instructor to transmit on a selected VHF/HF radio, listen
to channels/receivers or initiate a selective call (SELCAL) to simulate a ground radio
station wishing to communicate the flight crew.

This tab displays all available VHF and HF radios.

Each of these radios is assigned a radio name and displays:


• The selected frequency and,
• The name of the tuned GND Station type

Each radio includes three buttons:

Transmit Tap this button to transmit on the selected radio.

Receive Tap this button to listen to selected channels or receivers.

SELCAL Tap this button to initiate a SELCAL on the selected


transceiver or a call in the cockpit.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 62
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

Figure 38 RADIO Tab

8.9.3 INTERCOM Tab


The INTERCOM tab allows the instructor to communicate with Inter Communication
Systems (ICS) such as:
• Flight Deck (FLT)
• Cabin (CAB)
• Passenger Address (PA)

Each of the ICS includes:

Intercom Call Incoming Info


Intercom Name
Transmit Tap this button to allow the instructor to transmit on
the selected ICS. This button is disabled if there is
no power on a specific radio transmitter.

Receive Tap this button to allow the instructor to listen on the


selected ICS.

8.9.4 NAVIGATION Tab


The NAVIGATION tab allows the instructor to listen to the signal of navigation
systems such as:
• Navigation (NAV)
• Distance Measuring Equipment (DME)
• Marker Beacon
• Automatic Direction Finder (ADF)
• Instrument Landing System (ILS)

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 63
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Listening to a navigation receiver consists of selecting the relevant Receive button.

Each navigation receiver includes Navigation:


• Receiver name
• Tuned-in frequency
• Receiver station name

8.9.4.1 Receive
Tap the Receive button of the desired navigation radio to listen to the radio signal and
monitor the navigation receiver.

8.9.5 SPECIAL FEATURES Tab


The SPECIAL FEATURES tab allows the instructor to select various communication
modes such as private communication and communication monitoring as well as
other various types of calls.

8.9.5.1 Pilot Private


Tap this button to establish a private communication between the instructor and the
Pilot.

8.9.5.2 Copilot Private


Tap this button to establish a private communication between the instructor and the
Copilot.

8.9.5.3 Pilot Monitoring


Tap this button to monitor Pilot communications.

8.9.5.4 Copilot Monitor


Tap this button to monitor Co-pilot communications.

8.9.5.5 Emergency Call


Tap this button to simulate the instructor placing an emergency call in the cockpit.

8.9.5.6 MECH Call


Tap this button to simulate the instructor making a call from a mechanic (MECH) to
the cockpit crew.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 64
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.9.5.7 ATT Call


Tap this button to simulate the instructor making a call from an attendant (ATT) to
the cockpit crew.

8.9.5.8 EVAC
Tap this button to have the instructor trigger an EVACuation attention getter in the
cockpit.

8.9.5.9 Mask
Tap this button to activate the microphone in the instructor mask during cockpit
smoke simulation.

8.9.5.10 Hardware ACP


Tap this toggle button to activate/deactivate the Instructor Station Audio Control
Panel (ACP).

8.9.5.11 VHF LOS OVRD


Tap this button to allow communication irrespective of the aircraft LOS to the tuned
ground station or propagation degradation.

When selected, the instructor VHF radios are considered on-board as per the cockpit
crew’s VHF radios.

When deselected, the distance and elevation of the simulated aircraft with respect to
the tuned ground station are computed to realistically simulate air-to-ground
communication.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 65
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.10 WEIGHT & BALANCE Sliding Panel


The WEIGHT & BALANCE sliding panel allows the instructor to quickly configure
the weight of the aircraft. It includes all the necessary controls to quickly:
• Set the aircraft to predefined weights
• Adjust the Zero Fuel Weight
• Adjust the fuel weight
• Manage the fuel weight of each fuel tank

This sliding panel includes three main tabs:


• QUICKSETS
• PERFORMANCE DATA
• WEIGHT & CG

Figure 39 WEIGHT & BALANCE Sliding Panel

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 66
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.10.1 QUICKSETS Tab


The QUICKSETS Tab allows the instructor to set the aircraft to pre-defined aircraft
weights. Each setting includes a Gross Weight (GW) value, Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW)
and GW CG. This tab features three mutually exclusive buttons.

8.10.1.1 Light Weight


From the Normal state, tap this button to set the aircraft to the pre-defined aircraft
light weight.

8.10.1.2 Medium Weight


From the Normal state, tap this button to set the aircraft to the pre-defined aircraft
medium weight.

8.10.1.3 Heavy Weight


From the Normal state, tap this button to set the aircraft to the pre-defined aircraft
heavy weight.

8.10.2 PERFORMANCE DATA Tab


The PERFORMANCE DATA tab includes read-only fields that provide the status of
various flight control settings and aircraft speeds.

8.10.2.1 Stab Trim


This read-only field displays the Stab Trim adjustment setting.

8.10.2.2 Flaps
This read-only field displays the Flap Lever position in the cockpit.

8.10.2.3 V1
This read-only field displays the V1 speed. An FMS flag displayed next to the speed
indicates that the V1 speed originates from the FMS.

8.10.2.4 VR
This read-only field displays the VR speed. An FMS flag displayed next to the speed
indicates that the VR speed originates from the FMS.

8.10.2.5 V2
This read-only field displays the V2 speed. An FMS flag displayed next to the speed
indicates that the V2 speed originates from the FMS.

8.10.2.6 VREF
This read-only field displays the VREF speed. An FMS flag displayed next to the
speed indicates that the VREF speed originates from the FMS.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 67
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.10.3 WEIGHT & CG Tab


The WEIGHT & CG Tab allows the instructor to:
• Adjust the ZFW of the aircraft
• Set the total fuel weight on the aircraft
• Carry out fuel management functions such as:
o Individually adjust the fuel weight of each tank
o Balance the fuel in all tanks
o Freeze the fuel consumption during a training session.

Figure 40 Weight & CG Tab

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 68
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.10.3.1 ZFW
The Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) of the aircraft can be changed instantly in either one of
two ways:
• Input text field (kilograms/pounds x1000)
• Slider Control

To change the ZFW:


1) Tap on the ZFW input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the ZFW.

Adjusting the ZFW to a new value automatically results in a new Gross Weight value.
If the new gross weight value is outside limits as identified by approved data, then
fuel weight is also adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

8.10.3.2 Fuel
The Fuel weight of the aircraft can be changed instantly in either one of two ways:
• Input text field (kilograms/pounds x1000)
• Slider Control

To change the Fuel weight:


1) Tap on the Fuel input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the Fuel weight.

Adjusting the Fuel weight to a new value automatically results in a new Gross Weight
value. If the new gross weight value is outside limits as identified by approved data,
then Zero Fuel Weight is also adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

Note: Fuel onboard the aircraft is distributed in accordance with the aircraft fuel
distribution schedule.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 69
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.10.3.3 GW
The Gross Weight (GW) of the aircraft can be changed instantly in either one of two
ways:
• Input text field (kilograms/pounds x1000)
• Slider Control

To change the aircraft GW:


1) Tap on the GW input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the GW.

Adjusting the GW of the aircraft to a new value automatically results in a new ZFW
value. If the new ZFW value is outside limits as identified by approved data, then the
Fuel weight will also be adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

8.10.3.4 GW CG
The aircraft Gross Weight Center of Gravity (GW CG) can be changed instantly in
either one of two ways:
• Input text field (% MAC)
• Slider Control

To change the aircraft GW CG:


1) Tap on the GW CG input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the GW CG.

Adjusting the GW CG of the aircraft to a new value automatically results in a new


Zero Fuel Weight Center of Gravity (ZFW CG) value. If the new ZFW CG value is
outside limits as identified by approved data, then the Fuel weight is reduced and the
Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) is increased as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 70
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.10.3.5 ZFW CG
The aircraft Zero Fuel Weight Center of Gravity (ZFW CG) can be changed instantly
in either one of two ways:
• Input text field (% MAC)
• Slider Control

To change the aircraft ZFW CG:


1) Tap on the ZFW CG input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the ZFW CG.

Adjusting the ZFW CG of the aircraft to a new value automatically results in a new
aircraft GW CG value. If the new aircraft GW CG value is outside limits as identified
by approved data, then the Fuel weight is reduced and the Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) is
increased as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

8.10.3.6 Center of Gravity Limits Graph


This graph displays the Aircraft Weight vs Aircraft CG operating envelope of the
aircraft with the current weight and CG indicated by a cursor within the envelope.

As this is an interactive graph, the instructor can modify the current aircraft weight
and CG by simply touching and moving the cursor (+) inside the envelop on the
graph.

8.10.3.7 Left Outer Fuel Tank


The fuel weight of the Left Outer Fuel Tank can be changed instantly in either one of
two ways:
• Input text field (kilograms/pounds x1000)
• Slider Control

To change the Left Outer Fuel Tank weight:


1) Tap on the Left Outer input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the fuel weight.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 71
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Adjusting the fuel weight of the Left Outer Fuel Tank to a new value automatically
results in a new Gross Weight (GW) value. If the new Gross Weight (GW) value is
outside limits as identified by approved data, then Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) is also
adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

8.10.3.8 Left Inner Fuel Tank


The fuel weight of the Left Inner Fuel Tank can be changed instantly in either one of
two ways:
• Input text field (kilograms/pounds x1000)
• Slider Control

To change the Left Inner Fuel Tank weight:


1) Tap on the Left Inner input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the fuel weight.

Adjusting the fuel weight of the Left Outer Fuel Tank to a new value automatically
results in a new Gross Weight (GW) value. If the new Gross Weight (GW) value is
outside limits as identified by approved data, then Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) is also
adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

8.10.3.9 Right Outer Fuel Tank


The fuel weight of the Right Outer Fuel Tank can be changed instantly in either one
of two ways:
• Input text field (kilograms/pounds x1000)
• Slider Control

To change the Right Outer Fuel Tank weight:


1) Tap on the Right Outer input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the fuel weight.

Adjusting the fuel weight of the Right Outer Fuel Tank to a new value automatically
results in a new Gross Weight (GW) value. If the new Gross Weight (GW) value is
outside limits as identified by approved data, then Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) is also
adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 72
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.10.3.10 Right Inner Fuel Tank


The fuel weight of the Right Inner Fuel Tank can be changed instantly in either one of
two ways:
• Input text field (kilograms/pounds x1000)
• Slider Control

To change the Right Inner Fuel Tank weight:


1) Tap on the Right Inner input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the fuel weight.

Adjusting the fuel weight of the Right Inner Fuel Tank to a new value automatically
results in a new Gross Weight (GW) value. If the new Gross Weight (GW) value is
outside limits as identified by approved data, then Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) is also
adjusted as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

8.10.3.11 Center Fuel Tank


The fuel weight of the Center Fuel Tank can be changed instantly in either one of two
ways:
• Input text field (kilograms/pounds x1000)
• Slider Control

To change the Center Fuel Tank weight:


1) Tap on the Center input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to change the fuel weight of the center fuel tank.

Adjusting the fuel weight of the center fuel tank to a new value automatically results
in a new Gross Weight (GW) value. If the new Gross Weight (GW) value is outside
limits as identified by approved data, then Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) is also adjusted
as required. (Dynamic Min/Max).

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 73
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.10.3.12 Fuel Balance


From the Normal state, tap this action button to balance the fuel tank quantities.

This button illuminates while fuel balance is in progress, then this button returns to
the Normal state.

8.10.3.13 Fuel Freeze


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to activate the fuel freeze function.
From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to return to the Normal state and de-
activate the fuel freeze function.

When Fuel Freeze is activated:


• All aircraft instruments continue to indicate normally
o Except the fuel quantity indicators, as these remain inactive because no fuel
is consumed by the aircraft during Fuel Freeze.
• All other aircraft systems remain unaffected except for the effects of fuel freeze.
• Refuel remains possible.

During a reposition, the Fuel Freeze button is disabled until the reposition or flight
trim is completed.

8.10.3.14 Activate
Tap this button to execute the new weight and CG selection. This button is disabled if
no weight and CG changes have been selected.

8.10.3.15 Cancel
Tap this button to cancel the selected weight and CG values. This button is disabled if
no weight and CG changes have been selected.
8.11 SERVICES & DOORS Sliding Panel
The SERVICES & DOOR sliding panel allows the instructor to:
• Carry out certain ground service operations.
• Open and close various aircraft access doors.
• Emulate various Flight Deck door access requests

This sliding panel includes the following tabs:


• SERVICES
• DOORS

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 74
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

Figure 41 SERVICES & DOORS Sliding Panel

8.11.1 SERVICES Tab


The SERVICES tab includes all the necessary buttons to allow the instructor to
quickly carry out certain ground service operations.

Figure 42 SERVICES Tab

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 75
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.11.1.1 Nav Fast Align


From the Normal state, tap this action button to align the reference system. This
bypasses the systems normal alignment period (IRS, INS, AHRS, ADIRS).

This button:
• Illuminates active for two seconds.
• Is disabled when the reference system is aligned or the reference system is off.

8.11.1.2 Engine Quick Start


From the Normal state, tap this action button to start the dead engine. This only
occurs if the correct conditions are met (e.g. fuel available, fuel levers at idle).

This button:
• Illuminates until the engine is started.
• Is disabled when all engines are running.

8.11.1.3 Engine Stagger


Tap this toggle button to enable/disable the engine stagger effect. This effect when
enabled ensures that some of the engines readout values are not exactly the same, in
order to add realism to the simulation, e.g. EGT.

8.11.1.4 External Air


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to connect external pneumatic ground
air.
From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to disconnect external pneumatic
ground air.

External pneumatic air is automatically disconnected if the aircraft starts moving.

This button is disabled when the aircraft starts moving.

8.11.1.5 Ground Power AC


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to activate external AC electric power.
From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to deactivate external AC electric
power.

External AC electric power is automatically disconnected if the aircraft starts moving.

This button is disabled when the aircraft is moving.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 76
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.11.1.6 A/C on Chocks


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to apply chocks to the aircraft wheels.
In this condition, the aircraft does not move.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to remove chocks from the aircraft
wheels.

This button is disabled when the aircraft is moving.

The A/C On Jacks and the A/C On Chocks buttons are mutually exclusive.

8.11.1.7 A/C on Jacks


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to set the aircraft on jacks.

When the aircraft is on jacks condition, the aircraft is raised in such a way that the
landing gear strut is fully extended. It is then possible to:
• Raise and lower the landing gear
• Apply thrust without falling off or rotating around the jacks.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to remove the aircraft from the jacks
condition.

This button is disabled when the aircraft is moving. The A/C On Jacks and the A/C
On Chocks buttons are mutually exclusive.

8.11.1.8 APU Quick Start


From the Normal state, tap this action button to start the APU. Electrical and
pneumatic outputs are available within five seconds.

This button is disabled when:


• The APU is running or,
• If correct conditions for operating are not met
o Master switch on, CB in, fuel available.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 77
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.11.2 DOORS Tab


The DOORS tab includes all the necessary buttons to allow the instructor to:
• Open and close various aircraft doors
• Emulate various Flight Deck door access requests
• Control the emergency evacuation slides

By opening various aircraft doors, the instructor can train the flight crew to deal with
various door annunciations inside the cockpit.

This tab includes:


• Aircraft access door buttons
• SLIDES Section
• FLIGHT DECK ACCESS section
• CABIN READY section

Figure 43 DOORS Tab

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 78
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.11.2.1 Aircraft Access Door Buttons


The Aircraft Access Door Buttons allows the instructor to open/close various aircraft
access doors.

8.11.2.1.1 Close All Doors


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to open all aircraft doors.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap this toggle button to close all aircraft doors.

8.11.2.1.2 Avionic Doors


From the Normal state, tap an Avionic toggle button to open the associated avionic
equipment access door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap the Avionic button again to close the avionic
equipment access door.

8.11.2.1.3 Cabin (Forward Left Side)


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to open the forward passenger/crew LH
cabin door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap this toggle button to close the forward
passenger/crew LH cabin door.

8.11.2.1.4 Cabin (Forward Right Side)


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to open the forward passenger/crew RH
cabin door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap this toggle button to close the forward
passenger/crew RH cabin door.

8.11.2.1.5 Cabin (Aft Left Side)


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to open the aft passenger/crew LH cabin
door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap this toggle button to close the aft
passenger/crew LH cabin door.

8.11.2.1.6 Cabin (Aft Right Side)


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to open the aft passenger/crew RH cabin
door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap this toggle button to close the aft
passenger/crew RH cabin door.

8.11.2.1.7 EMER Exit (Left Side)


From the Normal state, tap on a left side EMER Exit toggle button to open the
associated LH overwing emergency exit door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap the EMER Exit toggle button again to close
the associated LH overwing emergency exit door.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 79
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.11.2.1.8 EMER Exit (Right Side)


From the Normal state, tap on a right side EMER Exit toggle button to open the
associated RH overwing emergency exit door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap the EMER Exit toggle button again to close
the associated RH overwing emergency exit door.

8.11.2.1.9 FWD Cargo


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to open the forward cargo compartment
door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap this toggle button to close the forward cargo
compartment door.

8.11.2.1.10 AFT Cargo


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to open the aft cargo compartment door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap this toggle button to close the aft cargo
compartment door.

8.11.2.1.11 Bulk Cargo


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to open the bulk cargo compartment
door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap this toggle button to close the bulk cargo
compartment door.

8.11.2.2 SLIDES Section


The SLIDES section includes two mutually exclusive buttons to arm or disarm all
emergency evacuation slides.

Arm All Slides (Light Blue) indicates that all emergency evacuation slides are armed.
Disarm All Slides (Light blue) indicates that all emergency evacuation slides are
disarmed.

8.11.2.3 FLIGHT DECK ACCESS Section


This section includes buttons allowing the instructor to train a pilot on how to use the
avionics instruments or equipment as it relates to the flight deck access door. In this
section the instructor can simulate:
• The locking of the flight deck access door
• An attendant trying to get access to the flight deck

8.11.2.3.1 Door
From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to open the flight deck access door.
From the Activated state (light blue), tap this toggle button to close the flight deck
access door.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 80
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.11.2.3.2 Routine Request


Tap this button to emulate a routine access request at the flight deck access door.
This button is disabled if the flight deck door access keypad is deactivated because an
access request has been denied or if the system controller is unpowered. When
selected, the button stays active for 2 seconds.

8.11.2.3.3 Emergency Request


Tap this button to emulate an emergency access request at the flight deck access door.
This button is disabled if the flight deck door access keypad is deactivated because an
access request has been denied or if the system controller is unpowered. When
selected, the button remains active for 2 seconds.

8.11.2.3.4 System Reset


Tap this button to reset the flight deck door RESET access system. This button is
disabled if the flight deck door access keypad is deactivated because an access
request has been denied or if the system controller is unpowered. When selected, the
button remains active for 2 seconds.

8.11.2.4 CABIN READY Section


The CABIN READY Section includes two mutually exclusive radio buttons to
activate the Cabin Ready Auto or Manual mode. Auto is usually the default mode but
when Manual mode is selected, this allows the the instructor to display a CABIN
READY indication on the ECAM/EICAS Display Unit (DU).

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 81
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.12 MALFUNCTIONS Sliding Panel


The MALFUNCTIONS sliding panel allows the instructor to preselect and activate
malfunctions into the simulation. There can be two types of malfunctions: Active or
Armed. An Active malfunction is indicated with a red flag and an Armed malfunction
to be triggered in accordance with selected criteria is indicated with a yellow flag.

Active and Armed malfunctions are displayed on the:


• Control Board MALFUNCTIONS section
• Control Board Footer
• Map Workspace Header
• MALFUNCTIONS sliding panel

Malfunctions can be removed from the simulation by tapping:


• The Control Board Clear button to clear single malfunction
• The Clear All Malfunctions button on the Control Board Footer
• The Clear Active and Clear Armed buttons on the sliding panel

Figure 44 MALFUNCTIONS Sliding Panel

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 82
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

The MALFUNCTIONS sliding panel includes:


• Status Section
• ATA CHAPTER Tab
• ALPHABETICAL Tab
• PHASE OF FLIGHT Tab

8.12.1 Status Section


The Status section provides a summary of Active and Armed malfunctions in the
simulation. It also offers the possibility to clear active and/or armed malfunctions or
clear all malfunctions.

Figure 45 Malfunctions Status Section

8.12.2 ATA CHAPTER Tab


The ATA CHAPTER tab provides a list of aircraft systems sorted by the ATA
Chapter number. The instructor can then view all available malfunctions on the IOS
for a specific ATA Chapter.

A warning flag next to an ATA Chapter indicates malfunctions that are Armed
and/or Active for a specific system.

If the flag is yellow, it indicates that the ATA system only has armed malfunctions.

If the flag is red, it indicates that the ATA system has Active malfunctions or has a
combination of multiple Armed and at least one Active malfunction.

8.12.3 ALPHABETICAL Tab


The ALPHABETICAL tab provides a list of aircraft systems sorted alphabetically.
The instructor can then view all available malfunctions on the IOS for a specific
aircraft system.

A warning flag next to an ATA Chapter indicates malfunctions that are Armed
and/or Active for a specific system.

If the flag is yellow, it indicates that the ATA system only has armed malfunctions.

If the flag is red, it indicates that the ATA system has Active malfunctions or has a
combination of multiple Armed and at least one Active malfunction.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 83
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.12.4 PHASE OF FLIGHT Tab (Optional)


The PHASE OF FLIGHT Tab is an option that provides a listing of malfunctions
grouped by phases of flight.

8.12.5 Activating/Arming a Malfunction


To activate/arm a Malfunction proceed as follows:
1) Select an aircraft system either by ATA chapter or alphabetically.
2) Select the desired malfunction for the selected aircraft system.
3) A malfunctions pane is displayed which includes the necessary controls to
allow the instructor to:
a) Immediately activate a malfunction
b) Arm a malfunction
c) Clear a single malfunction
d) View the description of the Malfunction Cause & Effect
e) Enter a parameter value

Figure 46 Malfunction Selection

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 84
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.12.5.1 Activate
Tap this button to immediately trigger the selected malfunction.

8.12.5.2 Clear
Tap this button to deactivate and clear the selected malfunction.

8.12.5.3 Edit Value


Tap this button to display a keypad that will allow the user to change the value of a
malfunction criteria.

8.12.5.4 Arm
Tap the Arm button to display the ARMING CRITERIA sliding panel.

8.12.5.5 CAUSE & EFFECT Section


This section provides a description of the Cause & Effect of the malfunction.

8.12.6 ARMING CRITERIA Sliding Panel


This sliding panel offers a list of criteria or conditions associated to the selected
malfunction. It allows the instructor select which criteria will serve to arm the
malfunction. When the criteria are met, the malfunction is triggered in the simulation
session.

The summary of the selected criteria is repeated next to the Arm button.

8.12.6.1 Arm
Tap this button to arm the malfunction which will be triggered in accordance with the
input criteria.

The Arm button is active when the instructor selects malfunction trigger Criteria.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 85
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 47 ARMING CRITERIA Sliding Panel

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 86
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.13 CIRCUIT BREAKERS Sliding Panel


The CIRCUIT BREAKERS sliding panel allows the instructor to trip and pop various
hardware and software Circuit Breakers (CBs) on a per aircraft system basis.

This sliding panel includes these tabs:


• ATA CHAPTER
• ALPHABETICAL (A – Z)
• CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Figure 48 CIRCUIT BREAKERS Sliding Panel

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 87
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 49 Circuit Breakers - Definitions

8.13.1 ATA CHAPTER Tab


The ATA CHAPTER tab provides a list of aircraft systems sorted by the ATA
Chapter number. The instructor can then, from this tab view all available Circuit
Breakers (CBs) on the IOS on a per system basis.

A red badge displayed next to a system indicates the number of circuit breakers that
are tripped/popped on that system.

8.13.2 ALPHABETICAL (A - Z) Tab


The ALPHABETICAL (A - Z) tab provides a list of aircraft systems sorted
alphabetically. The instructor can then, from this tab view all available Circuit
Breakers (CBs) on the IOS on a per system basis.

A red badge displayed next to a system indicates the number of circuit breakers that
are tripped/popped on that system.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 88
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.13.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS Tab


This CIRCUIT BREAKERS tab displays the status of all hardware and software CBs.
This tab is subdivided into two sections:
• HARDWARE CB
• SOFTWARE CB

Note: Software CBs cannot be reset by the flight crew.

8.13.3.1 HARDWARE CB
There are two kinds of hardware circuit breakers:
• Those that can be popped by the instructor and reset by the flight crew.
• Those that can be popped and tripped by the instructor but cannot be reset by the
flight crew.

Hardware CBs have the following statuses:

Indicates a circuit breaker that is not popped.

Indicates a circuit breaker that is popped by the instructor.


This CB can be reset by the flight crew.

Indicates a circuit breaker that is not popped/tripped.

Indicates a circuit breaker that is popped/tripped by the instructor.


This CB cannot be reset by the flight crew.

8.13.3.2 SOFTWARE CB
Software CBs have the following statuses:

Indicates a circuit breaker that is not tripped.

Indicates a circuit breaker that is tripped.

8.13.3.3 UNPOWERED Flag


Indicates that there is no electrical
current on the bus.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 89
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

8.14 FAIL SUMMARY Sliding Panel


The FAIL SUMMARY sliding panel provides an overall status of:
• Armed and active malfunctions
• Popped/tripped circuit breakers
• Failed radio stations

As this sliding panel combines all types of active or armed failures, it allows the
instructor to easily manage and control all failures in the training session.

This sliding panel includes three tabs:


• MALFUNCTIONS
• CIRCUIT BREAKERS
• RADIO STATIONS

8.14.1 MALFUNCTIONS Tab


The MALFUNCTIONS tab displays a summary of all the active and armed
malfunctions. From this tab the instructor has the possibility to clear all active or
armed malfunctions or clear a single active or armed malfunction.

Listed malfunctions have the following statuses:

Indicates that the malfunction is armed and ready to be triggered in


the training session

Indicates that the malfunction is active in the training session.

8.14.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS Tab


This CIRCUIT BREAKERS tab lists all the pulled, popped and tripped hardware and
software circuit breakers in the training session. The instructor has the possibility to
reset:
• A single CB
• All CBs in the training session.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 90
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.14.3 RADIO STATIONS Tab


The RADIO STATIONS Tab provides a list of all the failed radio stations in the
training session.

The instructor has the possibility to reset:


• A single radio station
• All radio stations in the training session.

Figure 50 FAILURE SUMMARY Sliding Panel

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 91
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
AIRCRAFT Tab

8.15 MALFUNCTIONS Section


The MALFUNCTIONS Section provides a summary of all active and/or armed
malfunctions.

In this section, the instructor can:


• Clear an active or armed malfunction as well as activate an armed malfunction.
• Scroll through when there are more than four malfunctions active or armed.

Figure 51 AIRCRAFT Tab – MALFUNCTIONS Section

8.15.1 Activate
Tap this button to activate the armed malfunction.

8.15.2 Clear
Tap this button to deactivate and clear the selected malfunction.

8.15.3 Clear All


Tap this button to deactivate and clear all armed or active malfunctions.

8.15.4 Tap to Add


Tap this button to open the MALFUNCTIONS sliding panel and add a new
malfunction to the simulation.

AIRCRAFT Tab
21 Mar 2019
Page 93
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9. REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


The REFERENCE AIRPORT tab allows the instructor to monitor and change:
• Ownship situation such as:
o Changing the reference airport and runway
o Repositioning aircraft at different preset locations
• Environmental conditions at the ownship such as:
o Runway conditions and lighting
o Clouds and visibility
o Wind speed and direction
o Precipitations and temperature

This tab also allows the instructor to introduce various takeoff/landing microburst and
windshear profiles to the training session.

Figure 52 REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 95
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.1 Parameter Input Text Fields


The REFERENCE AIRPORT tab includes parameter input text fields that upon
tapping will display the associated sliding panel or keypad.

Some parameters in this tab can also be adjusted using the Wheel Picker. To use the
wheel picker:
• Press and hold on a parameter until the Wheel Picker is displayed or swipe this
parameter up or down to display the Wheel Picker.
• Scroll through the selection and select:
o The green checkmark to confirm your selection.
o The red X to cancel your selection.

9.1.1 Airport
This input text field displays the ICAO code of current reference airport.

To change the reference airport either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the AIRFIELD & REPOSITION sliding
panel, or
• Use the Wheel Picker.

9.1.2 Runway
This input text field displays the current runway at the reference airport.

To change the current runway at the reference airport either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the AIRFIELD & REPOSITION sliding
panel, or
• Use the Wheel Picker.

9.1.3 Time of the Day


This input text field displays the current time of the day.

To change the current time of the day either:


• Tap on this input text field to display a keypad, or
• Use the Wheel Picker to change the general time of day: Dawn, Day, Dusk
Night.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 96
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.1.4 Surface Wind (Mag)


This input text field displays the current wind condition at the reference airport and
runway.

To change the current wind condition at the reference airport either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the SURFACE WIND sliding panel, or
• Press and hold the wind direction field and then use the Wheel Picker to change
the wind direction.
• Press and hold the wind speed field and then use the Wheel Picker to change the
wind speed.

9.1.5 Visibility
This input text field displays the current below cloud visibility.

To modify the below cloud visibility either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the Visibility keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the below cloud visibility or use the Wheel Picker.

9.1.6 RVR
This input text field displays the current Runway Visual Range (RVR).

To change the RVR either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the VISIBILITY / RVR sliding panel, or
• Use the Wheel Picker.

9.1.7 Precipitation
This input text field displays the current precipitation at the reference airport.

To change the precipitation either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the PRECIPITATION sliding panel, or
• Use the Wheel Picker.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 97
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.1.8 Clouds
This input text field displays the current clouds condition at the reference
airport/airfield.

To change the clouds condition either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the CLOUDS at the reference airport
sliding panel, or
• Use the Wheel Picker

9.1.9 Temperature
This input text field displays the current temperature at the refence airport/airfield.

To change the temperature at the refence airport/airfield either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the Reference Temperature keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the temperature or use the Wheel Picker.

9.1.10 ISA Dev


This input text field displays the current International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
Deviation (ISA Dev) at the reference airport/airfield.

To change the ISA deviation at the refence airport/airfield either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the Reference Airfield ISA Dev keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the ISA Dev or use the Wheel Picker.

9.1.11 QNH
This input text field displays the current QNH.

To change the QNH at the refence airport/airfield either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the QNH keypad.
• Use this keypad to change the airport sea level barometric pressure or use the
Wheel Picker.

9.1.12 Microburst/Windshear
This input text field displays the current microburst/windshear profile active in the
training session. Tap on this input text field to display the WINDSHEAR &
MICROBURST sliding panel and the microburst/windshear condition.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 98
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.1.13 Runway Condition


This input text field displays the current runway condition at the reference airport.

To change the runway contamination at the reference airport either:


• Tap on this input text field to display the RUNWAY CONDITIONS sliding
panel, or
• Use the Wheel Picker.

9.1.14 Interactive Airport Section


The interactive airport section of the REFERENCE AIRPORT tab allows the
instructor to change the runway at the reference airport by simply tapping on the
desired runway. A change in runway automatically updates the Control Board
Runway text field.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 99
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2 AIRPORT & REPOSITION Sliding Panel


The AIRPORT & REPOSITION sliding panel allows the instructor to:
• View and select a reference airport and runway
• View and select a destination airport and runway
• Reposition the aircraft to preset positions
• Perform various types of ground operations
• Adjust the intensity of runway lighting

This sliding panel includes the following tabs:


• REFERENCE LOCATION
• AIRPORT REPOSITION
• GROUND OPERATIONS
• FMS QUICKSET

Figure 53 AIRPORT & REPOSITION Sliding Panel

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 100
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.1 REFERENCE LOCATION Tab


The REFERENCE LOCATION tab allows the instructor to change the:
• Reference airport and active runway
• Destination airport and active runway

This tab consists of read-only text fields, expandable buttons and an Auto Reference
Location checkbox.

Figure 54 REFERENCE LOCATION Tab (Typical)

9.2.1.1 Reference Airport


This read-only text field displays the ICAO code of the reference airport and the
number of the active reference runway.

9.2.1.2 Destination Airport


This read-only text field displays the ICAO code of the destination airport and the
number of the active reference runway.

9.2.1.3 Change Reference Button


The Change Reference button allows the instructor to change the Reference Airport
and runway by selecting another airport ICAO code and associated runway.

Tap this expandable button to display the REFERENCE AIRPORT (LOCATION)


sliding panel. This panel shows a list of available airport ICAO codes along with
available runways for each airport.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 101
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2.1.4 Change Destination Button


The Change Destination button allows the instructor to change the Destination
Airport and runway by selecting another airport ICAO code and associated runway.

Tap this expandable button to display the DESTINATION AIRPORT (LOCATION)


sliding panel. This panel shows a list of available airport ICAO codes along with
available runways for each airport.

Figure 55 REFERENCE AIRPORT List (Typical)

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 102
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.1.5 Auto Reference Location


The Auto Reference Location checkbox allows the instructor to control how the
reference airfield is updated. This checkbox toggles between two modes: Auto and
Manual.

9.2.1.5.1 Auto Mode


Auto Mode allows automatic updates of the reference airfield to the nearest available
runway until the nearest is the arrival airfield (then the reference airfield locks to the
arrival airfield and runway). Selection unlocks if manual mode is selected or the
arrival airfield is changed.

9.2.1.5.2 Manual Mode


In Manual mode, the reference airfield and runway do not change unless there is a
new input from the instructor or the lesson plan.

9.2.2 AIRPORT REPOSITION Tab


The AIRPORT REPOSITION tab includes all the necessary controls to allow the
instructor to:
• Reposition the aircraft to preset positions.
• Adjust the lighting intensity of various runway sections.
• Adjust the intensity of the runway lights.
• Trigger failures of reference runway localizer and glideslope transmitters.

This tab includes the following sections:


• HOLD / TAXI
• GATE / PARKING SPOT
• Reposition Presets
• Runway Lighting

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 103
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 56 AIRPORT REPOSITION Tab (Typical)

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 104
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.2.1 HOLD / TAXI Section


This section includes mutually exclusive radio buttons that allow the instructor to
reposition the aircraft to various Hold and Taxi positions.

To reposition the aircraft to a Hold and Taxi position:


1) Tap on one of the position preset radio buttons.
2) Tap on the Reposition button to execute the repositioning.
Flight freeze is set at the end of the reposition and Speed Up is deactivated.

9.2.2.1.1 HOLD
Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to the corresponding Hold position.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear: Down
Flap: Flaps as is if the current flap lever position is valid for TAKEOFF;
otherwise, Flaps 5.
Doors: Closed

9.2.2.1.2 TAXI
Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to the corresponding Taxi position.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear: Down
Flap: Flaps as is if the current flap lever position is valid for TAKEOFF;
otherwise, Flaps 5.
Doors: Closed

9.2.2.2 GATE / PARKING SPOT Section


This section includes mutually exclusive radio buttons that allow the instructor to
reposition the aircraft to various Gate and Parking Spot positions.

To reposition the aircraft to a Gate and Parking Spot position:


1) Tap on one of the position preset radio buttons.
2) Tap on the Reposition button to execute the repositioning.
Flight freeze is set at the end of the reposition and Speed Up is deactivated.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 105
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2.2.2.1 Gate or Parking Spot Number


Tap the desired radio button to reposition the aircraft to the desired Gate/Parking Spot
position.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear: Down
Flap: Flaps up
Speed brake: Stowed
Doors 1L, right fwd and aft cargo doors open.

9.2.2.3 Reposition Presets Section


This section includes mutually exclusive radio buttons that allow the instructor to
reposition the aircraft to various airborne positions in relation to the current reference
runway.

Note: This section also includes a takeoff position preset.

To reposition the aircraft to various airborne positions:


1) Tap on one of the position preset radio buttons.
2) Tap on the Reposition button to execute the repositioning.
Flight freeze is set at the end of the reposition.

9.2.2.3.1 Medium Airwork


Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to 10,000 ft (baro) relative to the
current reference runway if the transition altitude is higher than 10,000 ft for the
current location. If the transition altitude for the current location is less than or equal
to 10,000 ft, then the reposition will be to FL100.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear : Up
Flap : Up
Speed: 250 KCAS
Altitude: 10000 feet ASL or FL100 as appropriate
Localizer Deviation: Centered
Profile : Level
Distance: 30 NM from reference runway

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 106
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.2.3.2 High Airwork


Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to FL350 relative to the current
reference runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear : Up
Flap : Up
Speed: Mach 0.78
Altitude: FL350
Localizer Deviation: Centered
Profile : Level
Distance: 100 NM from reference runway

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

9.2.2.3.3 1NM, 3NM LT


Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to LH downwind, 3 nm abeam and 1
nm prior to touchdown point, relative to the current reference runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear: Up
Flap: Flaps 1
Speed: 200KCAS
Localizer Deviation: 3 NM left
Altitude: 1500 feet AGL (*)
Profile: Level
Distance: 1 NM

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 107
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2.2.3.4 1NM, 3NM RT


Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to RH downwind, 3 nm abeam and 1
nm prior to touchdown point, relative to the current reference runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear: Up
Flap: Flaps 1
Speed: 200KCAS
Localizer Deviation 3 NM Right
Altitude: 1500 feet AGL (*)
Profile: Level
Distance: 1 NM

(*) AGL is with respect to reference runway threshold altitude.

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

9.2.2.3.5 T/O
Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to the takeoff (T/O) position on the
current reference runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear : Down
Flap : Flaps 1+F
Speed: Stationary
Altitude: On ground
Doors: Closed

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 108
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.2.3.6 3 NM Short Final


Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to 3 nm relative to the current reference
runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear : Down
Flap : Full
Speed: Vref +5 (*)
Localizer Deviation : Centered
Glideslope Deviation: Centered
Profile : Descent
Distance: 3 NM

(*) Vref is for the selected flaps, not full flaps.

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

9.2.2.3.7 6NM
Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to 6 nm relative to the current reference
runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear : Down
Flap : Flaps 3
Speed: F Speed
Localizer Deviation : Centered
Glideslope Deviation: Centered
Profile : Descent
Distance: 6 NM

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 109
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2.2.3.8 8NM
Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to 8 nm relative to the current reference
runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear: Up
Flap: Flaps 2
Speed: F Speed
Localizer Deviation: Centered
Altitude: 2000 feet AGL (*)
Profile: Level
Distance: 8 NM

(*) AGL is with respect to reference runway threshold altitude.

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

9.2.2.3.9 12NM, 1 NM LT
Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to 12 nm, 1 nm left relative to the
current reference runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear: Up
Flap: Flaps 1
Speed: 200KCAS
Localizer Deviation: 1 NM left
Altitude: 3000 feet AGL (*)
Profile: Level
Distance: 12 NM
Intercept Angle: 30 degrees

(*) AGL is with respect to reference runway threshold altitude.

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 110
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.2.3.10 12NM
Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to 12 nm relative to the current
reference runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear: Up
Flap: Flaps 1
Speed: 200KCAS
Localizer Deviation: Centered
Altitude: 3000 feet AGL (*)
Profile: Level
Distance: 12 NM

(*) AGL is with respect to reference runway threshold altitude.

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

9.2.2.3.11 12NM, 1NM RT


Tap this radio button to reposition the aircraft to 12 nm, 1 nm right relative to the
current reference runway.

In this reposition preset, the aircraft is configured as follows:

Gear: Up
Flap: Flaps 1
Speed: 200KCAS
Localizer Deviation: 1 NM right
Altitude: 3000 feet AGL (*)
Profile: Level
Distance: 12 NM
Intercept Angle: 30 degrees

(*) AGL is with respect to reference runway threshold altitude.

Note: Preset values are subject to change depending on the aircraft.

9.2.2.4 Runway Lighting Section


This section includes all the necessary controls to adjust the lighting intensity of
various sections of the active runway at the reference airport.

9.2.2.4.1 Runway
This button displays the active runway. Tap on the dropdown button to display
additional runways.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 111
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2.2.4.2 Runway Lights


The system automatically sets the runway lights at their optimal intensity for the time
of day and weather conditions. The user can however override that value.

This button displays the default lighting. Tap this dropdown button to expand
selection, then select to set default lighting on more than one runway.

An "*" indicates that the lights for a particular runway have different intensities.
(Min = 0, Max = 5)

9.2.2.4.3 Advanced Lighting


Tap this expandable button to display the RUNWAY LIGHTING sliding panel.

9.2.2.4.4 RUNWAY LIGHTING Sliding Panel


The RUNWAY LIGHTING sliding panel offers all the necessary controls to alter the
intensity of various runway sections and type of lighting.

Figure 57 RUNWAY LIGHTING Sliding Panel (Typical)

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 112
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.2.4.4.1 Runway List


From the list of runways, tap to select the desired runway for which lighting is to be
adjusted.

9.2.2.4.4.2 All Runway Lights


Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the intensity level for all
lighting categories of the active visual runway.
• Horizon
• Reils
• Centerline
• Touchdown
• Runway
• VLA
• Approach
• Environment lighting

An * indicates when all light intensities are not the same for the selected runway
(Min = 0, Max = 5).

9.2.2.4.4.3 Centerline
Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the centerline lighting
intensity (Min = 0, Max = 5).

9.2.2.4.4.4 Random Intensity


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to enable the runway lighting system to
have random intensity lighting.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to disable the runway lighting system
to have random intensity lighting.

This button affects the lighting of:


• Edge and Ends
• Centerline, and
• TD Zone

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 113
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2.2.4.4.5 TD Zone
Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the Touch Down (TD) zone
lighting intensity (Min = 0, Max = 5).

9.2.2.4.4.6 Visual Landing Aid (VLA)


Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the VLA lighting
brightness intensity (Min = 0, Max = 5).

9.2.2.4.4.7 Edge & Ends


Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the runway Edge and Ends
lighting intensity (Min = 0, Max = 5).

9.2.2.4.4.8 Reils
Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the Reils brightness
intensity (Min = 0, Max = 5).

9.2.2.4.4.9 Approach
Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the approach lighting
intensity for the active reference runway (Min = 0, Max = 5).

9.2.2.4.4.10 Strobe
Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the strobe lighting intensity
(Min = 0, Max = 5).

9.2.2.4.4.11 All RW Default Lighting


Tap on this expandable button to display the RUNWAY DEFAULT LIGHTING
sliding panel.

9.2.2.4.4.12 RUNWAY DEFAULT LIGHTING Sliding Panel


This sliding panel allows the instructor to choose the reference airport runway default
lighting.

Figure 58 RUNWAY DEFAULT LIGHTING Sliding Panel

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 114
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.2.4.5 Localizer
From the Normal state, tap this toggle fail button to trigger a failure of the reference
runway localizer transmitter.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle fail button to clear the failure and return to
the Normal state.

9.2.2.4.6 Glideslope
From the Normal state, tap this toggle fail button to trigger a failure of the reference
runway glideslope transmitter.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle fail button to clear the failure and return to
the Normal state.

9.2.3 GROUND OPERATIONS Tab


The GROUND OPERATIONS tab allows the instructor to:
• Carry out various ground operations such as aircraft push back
• Change the runway condition by adding various amounts of water, snow, ice or
sand
• Affect the aircraft braking action.
• Add traffic scenarios to the training session

Figure 59 Ground Operations Tab

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 115
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2.3.1 Ground Operations


The ground operations that can be performed include:
• Marshaller
• Aircraft Pushbacks
• A/C on Chocks

9.2.3.1.1 Marshaller
When the aircraft is within an appropriate position to the gate, the marshaller signals
in the aircraft to the gate.

From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to display the marshaller into the visual
scene.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to remove the marshaller into the
visual scene.

This Marshaller button is disabled depending on certain conditions, for example:


• When the aircraft is off the ground
• During an aircraft pushback

9.2.3.2 Aircraft Pushbacks


There are three types of push backs that can be carried out: Tail Left, Straight and
Tail Right.

9.2.3.2.1 Tail Left


Tap this button to execute an aircraft push back followed by a tail left turn. The
aircraft will move until it has reached its preprogrammed position. This button is
disabled when the aircraft is moving.

9.2.3.2.2 Straight
Tap this button to execute a straight aircraft push back. The aircraft will move until it
has reached its preprogrammed position. This button is disabled when the aircraft is
moving.

9.2.3.2.3 Tail Right


Tap this button to execute an aircraft push back followed by a tail right turn. The
aircraft will move until it has reached its preprogrammed position. This button is
disabled when the aircraft is moving.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 116
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.3.3 A/C on Chocks


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to apply chocks to the aircraft wheels.
In this condition, the aircraft does not move.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to remove chocks from the aircraft
wheels.

This button is disabled when the aircraft is moving.

The A/C On Jacks and the A/C On Chocks buttons are mutually exclusive.

9.2.3.4 RUNWAY CONDITION Section


This section includes a Runway Condition expandable button that allows the
instructor to modify the runway surface by adding contaminants such water, snow, ice
or sand.

9.2.3.4.1 Runway Condition


Tap this expandable button to display the RUNWAY CONDITION sliding panel.

The RUNWAY CONDITION sliding panel is described in paragraph 9.14.

9.2.3.5 VISUAL EFFECT Section


This section includes expandable buttons that allow the instructor to play recorded
traffic scenarios. The number of buttons available depends on the IOS configuration.

9.2.3.5.1 Record Traffic


Tap this expandable button to display the RECORDED TRAFFIC sliding panel. This
button is disabled if gates traffic or TCAS/random traffic is active.

9.2.3.5.2 RECORDED TRAFFIC Sliding Panel


The RECORDED TRAFFIC sliding panel lists a summary of all previously recorded
traffic scenario effects that the instructor can add to the visual scene. The selected
scenario that is played is added to the visual scene at the reference airport and active
runway.

9.2.3.5.2.1 Play
Tap this toggle button next to a scenario to play the selected recorded traffic scenario.
Tap on the button again to pause the scenario.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 117
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 60 RECORDED TRAFFIC Sliding Panel

9.2.3.5.3 Scenario Traffic


Tap this expandable button to display the SCENARIO TRAFFIC sliding panel. This
button is disabled if gates traffic or TCAS/random traffic is active.

9.2.3.5.4 SCENARIO TRAFFIC Sliding Panel


The SCENARIO TRAFFIC sliding panel allows the instructor to add traffic effects to
the visual scene by playing pre-recorded traffic scenarios. The selected scenario that
is played is added to the visual scene at the reference airport and active runway.

A FILTER tab allows the instructor to filter the available recorded scenario by
various category.

Figure 61 SCENARIO TRAFFIC Sliding Panel

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 118
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.4 FMS QUICKSET Tab


The FMS QUICKSET tab provides controls to save the current flight plan and load
previously saved flight plans.

Figure 62 FMS QUICKSET Tab

9.2.4.1 FMS Save


Tap this button to activate the process of saving the selected FMS Memory flight
plan.

9.2.4.2 FMS Recall


Tap this button to recall the selected FMS Memory flight plan.

9.2.4.3 FMS Memory


Tap this button to display the FMS MEMORY SAVE/RECALL sliding panel.

9.2.5 FMS MEMORY SAVE/RECALL Sliding Panel


The FMS MEMORY SAVE/RECALL Sliding Panel allows the instructor to save the
current FMS flight plan or load a previously saved flight plan into the FMS memory.

This sliding panel provides all the controls to:


• Take a snapshot of the current FMS memory and save it on the simulator host
computer.
• Recall a saved flight plan file from the simulation host computer and load it into
the FMS memory.

Note: The process of Saving/Recalling flight plans can be applied to both


Password Protected and Unprotected flight plans.

CAUTION: THE NDB IS UPDATED EVERY 28 DAYS. WHEN THIS


HAPPENS, ALL FLIGHT PLANS CREATED WITH THE
PREVIOUS NDB WILL NO LONGER BE AVAILABLE.
THEREFORE, WHEN A NEW NDB IS INSTALLED, THE
FLIGHT PLANS MUST BE RECREATED.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 119
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

This sliding panels includes the following tabs:


• MESSAGE
• PASSWORD PROTECTED
• UNPROTECTED

Figure 63 FMS Memory Save/Recall

9.2.5.1 MESSAGE Tab


This tab includes the basic controls to save and recall flight plans.

9.2.5.1.1 Description
Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow entry of a description of
the flight plan to be saved.

9.2.5.1.2 Password
Tap this input text field to display a keypad that will allow entry of a valid password
of up to 10 characters.

9.2.5.1.3 Save
Tap this button to activate the process of saving the selected FMS Memory flight
plan.

9.2.5.1.4 Recall
Tap this button to recall the selected FMS Memory flight plan.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 120
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.2.5.1.5 Cancel
Tap to cancel the current entry.

9.2.5.1.6 Delete Selected


Tap this button to delete the selected FMS Memory flight plan.

9.2.5.1.7 Clear all Unprotected


Tap to this button to clear all FMS Memory flight plans listed under the
UNPROTECTED tab.

9.2.5.2 PASSWORD PROTECTED Tab


This tab lists all the password protected flight plan numbers that can be saved or
recalled. This tab displays the FMC flight plan description saved in that flight plan
number slot.

9.2.5.3 UNPROTECTED Tab


This tab lists all the unprotected flight plan numbers that can be saved or recalled.
This tab displays the FMC flight plan description saved in that flight plan number
slot.

9.2.5.4 Saving a Password Protected Flight Plan


To save a Password Protected Flight Plan:
1) Tap on the Password input text field and use keypad to enter a valid password.
2) From the PASSWORD PROTECTED Tab, tap on the desired flight plan
NUMBER.
3) Tap on the SAVE button to save.
4) After a few seconds, a message will appear prompting the use to enter a
description.
5) Press the DESCRIPTION input text field at the top of the page to enter the
description or press CANCEL to keep the generic name.

9.2.5.5 Saving an Unprotected Flight Plan


To save an Unprotected Flight Plan:
1) From the UNPROTECTED Tab, tap on the desired flight plan NUMBER.
2) Tap on the SAVE button to save.
3) After a few seconds, a message will appear prompting the use to enter a
description.
4) Press the DESCRIPTION input text field at the top of the page to enter the
description or press CANCEL to keep the generic name.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 121
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.2.5.6 Recalling a Flight Plan


To recall a Password Protected or Unprotected Flight Plan:
1) From either the PASSWORD PROTECTED Tab or the UNPROTECTED Tab,
tap on the desired flight plan NUMBER to select.
2) Tap on the RECALL button to initialize the load procedure.

9.2.5.7 SIMSOFT CONTROLS Tab


This tab is aircraft specific and as such is not always available on the IOS
configuration. But when available includes these controls.

9.2.5.7.1 Save
Tap this button to send a command to the FMS to save a copy of the entered flight
plan in the FMS internal memory. Only one flight plan at a time can be saved in this
manner. This flight plan is not saved in the simulation host computer.

9.2.5.7.2 Recall
Tap this button to recall the flight plan saved in the FMS memory.

9.2.5.7.3 Inhibit Auto Recall


Selecting Inhibit Automatic Recall, when active, a flight plan saved at a specific
airport/runway will automatically be recalled after reposition to the same location.

9.2.6 Reposition Button


Tap this button to execute the selected reposition.

While the system is executing the reposition, it enters the Flight Freeze mode until the
reposition is complete.

9.2.7 Discard Button


Tap this button to cancel the selected reposition. This also closes the sliding panel.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 122
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.3 Time of the Day Keypad


The Time of the Day keypad displays the current time of day.

To change the time of day:


1) Use the keypad or the slider control to enter a new time of day.
2) Tap on the green checkmark to confirm your selection or the red X to cancel
the entry.

The slider control can vary the Time of the Day from 0-23 hrs (i.e. dawn, day, dusk or
night conditions) on the visual display.

Figure 64 Time of the Day Keypad

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 123
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.4 TIME OF DAY Sliding Panel


The TIME OF DAY sliding panel allows the instructor to
• Quickly alter the time of day (Dawn, Day, Dusk and night)
• Adjust the simulation time by a speed up factor (i.e. increase the simulation
time)
o Varying between (one to 500) X the normal speed which is one second.
• Enable the showing of the moon and sun in the simulation

Figure 65 TIME OF DAY Sliding Panel

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 124
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.5 SURFACE WIND Sliding Panel


The SURFACE WIND sliding panel allows the instructor to introduce a runway wind
condition into the simulation. This sliding panel provides all the necessary controls to
manage the wind condition at the reference airport and runway.

This sliding panel includes two tabs:


• QUICK SELECTION
• WIND COMPASS

Figure 66 SURFACE WIND Sliding Panel

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 125
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.5.1 QUICK SELECTION Tab


The QUICK SELECTION tab allows the instructor to quickly select a runway surface
head wind, tail wind or crosswind condition by simply selecting either one of the
available pre-set buttons.

Figure 67 QUICK SELECTION Tab

9.5.1.1 H10
Tap this button to set a runway surface head wind of 10 knots or 5.14 m/s (displayed
as 5). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield wind.

9.5.1.2 H20
Tap this button to set a runway surface head wind of 20 knots or 10.29 m/s (displayed
as 10). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield wind.

9.5.1.3 H30
Tap this button to set a runway surface head wind of 30 knots or 15.43 m/s (displayed
as 15). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield wind.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 126
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.5.1.4 T5
Tap this button to set a runway surface tail wind of 5 knots or 2.57 m/s (displayed as
3). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield wind.

9.5.1.5 T10
Tap this button to set a runway surface tail wind of 10 knots or 5.14 m/s (displayed as
5). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield wind.

9.5.1.6 T15
Tap this button to set a runway surface tail wind of 15 knots or 7.71 m/s (displayed as
8). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield wind.

9.5.1.7 L10
Tap this button to set a runway surface left crosswind of 10 knots or 5.14 m/s
(displayed as 5). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield
wind.

9.5.1.8 L20
Tap this button to set a runway surface left crosswind of 20 knots or 10.28 m/s
(displayed as 10). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield
wind.

9.5.1.9 L38
Tap this button to set a runway surface left crosswind of 38 knots or 19.54 m/s
(displayed as 20). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield
wind.

9.5.1.10 R10
Tap this button to set a runway surface right crosswind of 10 knots or 5.14 m/s
(displayed as 58). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield
wind.

9.5.1.11 R20
Tap this button to set a runway surface right crosswind of 20 knots or 10.28 m/s
(displayed as 10). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield
wind.

9.5.1.12 R38
Tap this button to set a runway surface right crosswind of 38 knots or 19.54 m/s
(displayed as 20). The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield
wind.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 127
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.5.2 WIND COMPASS Tab


The WIND COMPASS tab features a wind compass indicator that provides a quick
overall status of the runway wind condition.

This wind compass indicator consists of a runway and vectors with associated labels
representing the current surface wind speed and direction.

The wind speed is represented by the length of the wind vector and the wind direction
is represented by the direction of the vector.

The wind compass indicator is interactive as it allows the instructor to quickly adjust
the wind direction by touching the vector arrow and moving it slowly on the wind
compass.

Figure 68 WIND COMPASS Tab

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 128
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.5.2.1 Runway Wind Components


This read-only text field displays the new runway wind component (Head/Tail or
Crosswind) on the wind compass. The value is blank on zero.

9.5.2.2 Runway Up
Tap this checkbox to ensure that the runway is always pointing upwards on the
screen.

9.5.2.3 FAA Gust Backing


Tap this checkbox to set the FAA gust active. When active:
• For a left x-wind, a backing (counter clockwise) gust will occur.

This button is disabled when a x-wind does not exist.

9.5.2.4 FAA Gust Veering


Tap this checkbox to set the FAA gust active. When active:
• For a right x-wind, a veering (clockwise) gust will occur.

This button is disabled when a x-wind does not exist.

9.5.3 Reference Airport


This read-only text field displays the ICAO code of the reference airport and the
number of the active reference runway.

9.5.4 Wind
This input text field displays the current wind direction and speed at the aircraft. Tap
on this input text field to display a wind direction and speed keypad. Use the keypad
to enter an airfield magnetic wind direction and wind speed.

The entire wind profile will be offset by the change in the airfield wind. The wind
gust will be reset to zero when the wind is set to zero.
(Min = 1, Max = 360 deg) wind direction
(Min = 0, Max = Dynamic, kt or m/s) wind speed

9.5.5 Gusting to
This input text field displays the current wind gust value. Tap on this input text field
to display a Gust Speed keypad. Use the keypad to enter an absolute wind gust value.

If the surface wind is 15 kt (7.5 m/s) and the absolute gust entered value is 25 kt (12.5
m/s), the instantaneous surface wind will randomly vary between 15 kt (7.5 m/s) and
25 kt (12.5 m/s).

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 129
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

If the surface wind is changed, the relative gust value, in this case 10 kt (5 m/s), will
be maintained. Therefore, if the wind is changed to 20 kt (10 m/s), the absolute gust
will be changed to 30 kt (15 m/s).

If the entered gust value equals the surface wind value, the number will not be
displayed and will be replaced by the text 'No Gust'.

If the surface wind is set to calm conditions, the absolute gust value will be reset and
the 'Gusting to' button will be disabled.

9.5.6 FAA Gust


Tap this checkbox to set the FAA gust active.
When active:
• For a left x-wind, a backing (counter clockwise) gust will occur.
• For a right x-wind, a veering (clockwise) gust will occur.

This button is disabled when a x-wind does not exist.

9.5.7 Calm Surface Wind


From the Normal state, tap this action button to eliminate wind at the surface.

This action sets:


• Surface wind speed to 0 knots
• Surface wind direction to 0 degrees
• Wind gust to 0 knots

9.5.8 Calm All Winds


Tap this button to reset the wind profile. This action will reset all winds at all
altitudes to 0kts.

9.5.9 Activate
Tap this button to set the new wind selection as the current surface wind.

9.5.10 Cancel
Tap this button to cancel the wind direction selection.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 130
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.6 Visibility Keypad


The Visibility keypad displays the current below cloud visibility.

To change the below cloud visibility:


1) Use the keypad or the slider control to change the below cloud visibility.
2) Tap on the green checkmark to confirm your selection or the red X to cancel
the entry.

Figure 69 Visibility

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 131
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.7 VISIBILITY / RVR Sliding Panel


The VISIBILITY / RVR sliding panel allows the instructor to change visibility
parameters at the reference airport. It consists of a Visibility input text field and a
FOG section.

Figure 70 Visibility/RVR

9.7.1 Visibility
This input text field displays the current below cloud visibility. Tap on this input text
field to display the Visibility keypad. Use the keypad to change the below cloud
visibility.

9.7.2 FOG Tab


This tab includes fog radio buttons that are mutually exclusive.

9.7.2.1 None
Tap this button to remove the current fog condition.

9.7.2.2 Patchy
Tap this button to activate a patchy fog condition. During a patchy fog condition,
default minimum and maximum Runway Visual Range (RVR) values are set.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 132
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.7.2.3 Solid
Tap this button to activate a solid fog condition.

9.7.2.4 RVR Min/Max


Tap this input text field to enter a minimum/maximum RVR range in the selected unit
(meters/feet). This input text field is only available during a patchy fog condition.

RVR MIN
(Min = 0, Max = RVR max)

RVR MAX
(Min = RVR min, Max = 3045 meters)
(Min = RVR min, Max = 9990 feet)

9.7.2.5 RVR
Tap this input text field to enter a Runway Visual Range (RVR) in the selected unit
(meters/feet).

RVR applies within the fog layer only, whereas visibility is the prevailing visibility
above the fog top.

For TROPOS visual, this button is only available when patchy fog is not active.

(Min = 0, Max = 3045 meters)


(Min = 0, Max = 9990 feet)

9.7.2.6 Fog Top


Tap this input text field to enter a fog top value above ground in geometric feet
(Dynamic Min/Max).

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 133
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.8 PRECIPITATION Sliding Panel


The PRECIPITATION sliding panel allows the instructor to introduce various types
of precipitation in the visual scene (reference airport).

This sliding panel features buttons that are mutually exclusive and allow the
instructor to manually introduce various types of precipitation such as:
• Rain
• Snow
• Hail

Figure 71 PRECIPITATION Sliding Panel

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 134
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.8.1 Light Rain


Tap this button to set the amount of rain to 33% (light rain setting).

When light rain is selected, visibility is set to 15 nautical miles unless restricted by a
previously set below cloud visibility. In this setting, if no clouds were previously
defined, clouds will automatically be inserted in the visual scene.

From the activated state, tap this button again to deselect this setting.

When light rain is deselected, visibility goes back to the pre-rain visibility.

This button is disabled when the temperature is below -5 degrees Celsius.

9.8.2 Moderate Rain


Tap this button to set the amount of rain to 66% (moderate rain setting).

When moderate rain is selected, visibility is set to 5 nautical miles unless restricted by
a previously set below cloud visibility. In this setting, if no clouds were previously
defined, clouds will automatically be inserted in the visual scene.

From the activated state, tap this button again to deselect this setting.

When moderate rain is deselected, visibility goes back to the pre-rain visibility.

This button is disabled when the temperature is below -5 degrees Celsius.

9.8.3 Heavy Rain


Tap this button to set the amount of rain to 100% (heavy rain setting).

When heavy rain is selected, visibility is set to 1 nautical miles unless restricted by a
previously set below cloud visibility. In this setting, if no clouds were previously
defined, clouds will automatically be inserted in the visual scene.

From the activated state, tap this button again to deselect this setting.

When heavy rain is deselected, visibility goes back to the pre-rain visibility.

This button is disabled when the temperature is below -5 degrees Celsius.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 135
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.8.4 Snow
Tap this button to set a pre-defined amount of snow to the visual scene.

From the activated state, tap this button again to deselect this setting.

This button is disabled when the temperature is above 5 degrees Celsius.

9.8.5 Hail
Tap this button to set the amount of hail to 33% (light hail setting). In this setting, if
no clouds were previously defined, clouds will automatically be inserted in the visual
scene.

From the activated state, tap this button to remove hail from the simulation.

This button is disabled when the temperature is below -5 degrees Celsius.

9.8.6 EFFECT Tab


The EFFECT Tab provides additional precipitation settings.

9.8.6.1 Winter Scene


Tap this button to display a winter scene on the visual scene.

From the activated state, tap this button to remove the winter scene from the visual
scene.

This button is disabled when the temperature is above 20 degrees Celsius or when a
significant latitude/longitude change has occurred, until the visual is ready.

9.8.6.2 Blowing Snow


Tap this button to enable the blowing snow effect of on the visual scene.

When blowing snow is enabled, blowing snow will occur only when a winter scene is
active and the wind is a non-zero value. When the blowing snow effect is active, the
visibility is reduced. This button is disabled when a winter scene is not active.

From the activated state, tap this button to remove the blowing snow effect from the
visual scene.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 136
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.8.6.3 Blowing Sand


Tap this button to activate the blowing sand effect on the visual scene.

From the activated state, tap this button to deactivate the blowing snow effect.

This button:
• Has no effect if the surface wind is set to zero.
• Is disabled when the temperature is below -5 degrees Celsius.

9.8.6.4 Lightning & Thunder


Tap this button to activate the lightning and thunder effect on the simulation.

From the activated state, tap this button to deactivate the lightning and thunder effect
from the simulation.
9.9 CLOUDS Sliding Panel
The CLOUDS sliding panel allows the instructor to modify cloud and visibility
parameters at the reference airport region. It consists of the same controls as the
CLOUDS sliding panel in the CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab.

Refer to paragraph 7.2 for details.

Note: The reference airport code and runway number will be located at the top
of the CLOUDS sliding panel.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 137
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.10 Ref Temp Keypad


The Ref Temp keypad displays the current temperature at the refence airport.

To change the temperature:


1) Use the keypad or the slider control to change the temperature at the reference
airport.
2) Tap on the green checkmark to confirm your selection or the red X to cancel
the entry.

The entire temperature profile will be offset by the change in the ground temperature.
(Dynamic Min/Max).

Figure 72 Ref Temp Keypad

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 138
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.11 ISA Dev Keypad


The ISA Dev keypad displays the current ISA temperature deviation at the airport.

To change the ISA temperature deviation:


1) Use the keypad to change the temperature deviation from ISA at the
corresponding level in degrees Celsius. (Dynamic Min/Max).
2) Tap on the green checkmark to confirm your selection or the red X to cancel
the entry.

Figure 73 ISA Dev Keypad

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 139
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.12 QNH Keypad


The QNH keypad displays the current airport sea level barometric pressure.

To change the airport sea level barometric pressure:


1) Use the keypad or the slider control to enter a new barometric pressure in the
selected unit (hectopascals/inches Hg).
2) Tap on the green checkmark to confirm your selection or the red X to cancel
the entry.

Figure 74 QNH Keypad

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 140
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.13 WINDSHEAR & MICROBURST Sliding Panel


The WINDSHEAR & MICROBURST sliding panel allows the instructor to introduce
various landing and takeoff windshear and microburst profiles in the simulation.

This sliding panel includes three tabs:


• MICROBURST
• PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR
• NON-PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR

Figure 75 WINDSHEAR & MICROBURST Sliding Panel

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 141
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.13.1 MICROBURST Tab


The MICROBURST tab includes TAKEOFF PROFILES and LANDING PROFILES
radio buttons that allow the instructor to choose only one microburst profile at time as
these radio profile buttons are mutually exclusive.

This sliding panel also offers controls to adjust certain microburst parameters.

The selected microburst profile is shown on a map to visualize the microburst


situation.

9.13.1.1 Microburst Map


The microburst map includes:

Cyan Cross Hairs: These represent the reference point of a group of microburst
cells which can be moved by changing the values in the X-Y
position input fields.
White Circle(s): These represent the microburst cells which are located at a
fixed predefined distance from the reference point.
Offset Distances: The X-Y position input fields represent the offset distances of
the reference point (cyan cross hairs).

By changing the offset distances, the user can move the


reference point to the desired position.

This will also move the microburst cells (white circle(s)).


These offsets will be kept in memory up until the microburst
scenario is deselected.

9.13.1.2 TAKEOFF PROFILE Section


This section list all available takeoff microburst profiles which are mutually
exclusive.

9.13.1.2.1 New Orleans Accident


Tap on this radio button to activate the New Orleans Accident microburst profile.

This profile simulates the shear encountered on takeoff in the New Orleans accident.

There is a single core centered headwind change when flying through the strongest
portion of the microburst is 50kts.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 142
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.13.1.2.2 Tucson in 1977 Denver in 1984


Tap on this radio button to activate the Tucson in 1977 Denver in 1984 microburst
profile.

This profile emulates the winds seen in the Tucson accident of 1977 and again in
Denver in 1984.

There are two cores for this profile:


• One located 3,700 ft beyond the runway threshold and 800 ft to the right of the
centerline
• The other, located 3,700 ft beyond the threshold and 200 ft to the right of the
centerline

The maximum headwind change when flying through the strongest portion of the
microburst is 70 kts.

9.13.1.3 LANDING PROFILE Section


This section list all available landing microburst profiles which are mutually
exclusive.

9.13.1.3.1 1975 Kennedy Shear Accident


Tap on this radio button to activate the 1975 Kennedy Shear Accident microburst
profile.

This profile simulates the shear and downdraft experienced by an L1011 that aborted
on approach shortly before the 1975 Kennedy shear accident.

There is a single core centered at 5,000 ft in front of the threshold and 400 ft to the
right of the runway centerline.

The maximum wind change when flying through the strongest portion of the
microburst is 50 kts.

9.13.1.3.2 Headwind X Wind on Final Approach


Tap on this radio button to activate the Headwind Xwind on Final Approach
microburst profile.

This profile presents the pilot on late final approach with a challenging combination
of headwind and crosswind shear.

There is a single core centered at 4,000 ft in front of the runway threshold and 1,800
ft to the right of the runway centerline.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 143
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

The maximum wind change when flying through the strongest portion of the
microburst is 25 kts.

9.13.1.3.3 Wind Model from Aug 5 Jaws Data


Tap on this radio button to activate the Wind Model from Aug 5 Jaws Data
microburst profile.

This profile emulates the wind variations defined by the Joint Airport Weather
Studies (JAWS) project 1983 report.

The JAWS project was set up in 1982 by the University of Chicago and the National
Center for Atmospheric Research.

There are four cores in this profile that are positioned as follows:
1) 8,000 ft in front of threshold and 200 ft to the left of centerline.
2) 7,000 ft in front of threshold and 200 ft to the left of centerline.
3) 5,750 ft in front of threshold and 900 ft to the left of centerline.
4) 1,500 ft in front of threshold and 400 ft to the left of centerline.

9.13.1.4 Description Button


Tap on this Button to obtain a full description of each takeoff and landing microburst
profile. It provides profile parameters such as:
• Core Radius
• Core Height
• Max Velocity
• Longitudinal distance to threshold
• Lateral distance from runway centerline

9.13.1.5 X Position
The X Position input text field displays the microburst X Position.

Tap the input text field to change the microburst X position relative to the touchdown
point. (Min = -5, Max = 8 nautical miles).

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 144
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.13.1.6 Y Position
The Y Position input text field displays the microburst Y Position.

Tap the input text field to change the microburst Y position relative to the touchdown
point. (Min = -3, Max = 3 nautical miles).

9.13.1.7 Intensity Buttons


The microburst intensity buttons are mutually exclusive.

9.13.1.7.1 Light
Tap this button to set the microburst intensity to light.

9.13.1.7.2 Moderate
Tap this button to set the microburst intensity to moderate.

9.13.1.7.3 Severe
Tap this button to set the microburst intensity to severe.

9.13.1.8 Turbulence
This read-only field displays the nominal intensity of the enabled turbulence.

9.13.1.9 Activate Microburst


Tap this button to activate the selected microburst profile. This button is disabled
when a microburst profile is activated.

9.13.1.10 Clear Microburst


Tap this button to deactivate the active Microburst profile. This button is disabled
when no microburst profile is activated.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 145
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.13.2 PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR Tab


The PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR tab includes TAKEOFF PROFILES and
LANDING PROFILES radio buttons that allow the instructor to choose only one
windshear profile at time as radio profile buttons are mutually exclusive.

This sliding panel also offers controls to adjust certain windshear parameters.

The selected windshear profile is shown on a map to visualize the situation.

Figure 76 PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR Tab

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 146
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.13.2.1 TAKEOFF PROFILE Section


This section lists all available predictive windshear takeoff profiles which are
mutually exclusive.

9.13.2.1.1 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt


Tap this radio button to activate the predictive windshear profile described below:
• Tailwind increasing to XX kts.
• Windshear position will be initialized at 3,000 feet from the runway threshold on
takeoff.

9.13.2.1.2 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, along with varying updrafts, downdrafts, and
crosswind
Tap this radio button to activate the predictive windshear profile described below:
• Tailwind increasing to XX kts, along with varying updrafts, downdrafts, and
crosswind.
• Windshear position will be initialized at 6000 feet from the runway threshold on
takeoff.

9.13.2.1.3 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, along with downdraft


Tap this radio button to activate the predictive windshear profile described below:
• Tailwind increasing to XX kts, along with downdraft.
• Windshear position will be initialized at 6000 feet from the runway threshold on
takeoff.

9.13.2.2 LANDING PROFILE Section


This section lists all available predictive windshear landing profiles which are
mutually exclusive.

9.13.2.2.1 Headwind Increasing to XX kt, switching to XXX kts tailwind, along with
varying updrafts, downdrafts and crosswind
Tap this radio button to activate the predictive windshear profile described below:
• Headwind increasing to XX kts, switching to XXX kts tailwind, along with
varying updrafts, downdrafts and crosswind.
• Windshear position will be initialized at 12000 feet, 2nm before the runway
threshold on approach.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 147
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.13.2.2.2 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt


Tap this radio button to activate the predictive windshear profile described below:
• Tailwind increasing to XX kts.
• Windshear position will be initialized at 6000 feet before the runway threshold
on approach.

9.13.2.3 X Position
The X Position input text field displays the windshear X Position.

Tap the input text field to change the fixed windshear X position relative to the
touchdown point on the runway in nautical miles (Min = -8, Max = 5 nautical miles).

9.13.2.4 Y Position
The Y Position input text field displays the windshear Y Position.

Tap the input text field to change the fixed windshear Y position relative to the
touchdown point on the runway in nautical miles (Min = -3, Max = 3 nautical miles).

9.13.2.5 Intensity Buttons


The predictive windshear intensity buttons are mutually exclusive.

9.13.2.5.1 Light
Tap this button to set the predictive windshear profile intensity to light.

9.13.2.5.2 Moderate
Tap this button to set the predictive windshear profile intensity to moderate.

9.13.2.5.3 Severe
Tap this button to set the predictive windshear profile intensity to severe.

9.13.2.6 Turbulence
This read-only field displays the nominal intensity of the enabled turbulence.

9.13.2.7 Activate Windshear


Tap this button to activate the selected windshear profile. This button is disabled
when a windshear profile is activated.

9.13.2.8 Clear Windshear


Tap this button to deactivate the active windshear profile. This button is disabled
when no windshear profile is activated.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 148
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.13.3 NON-PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR Tab


The NON-PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR tab includes TAKEOFF PROFILES and
LANDING PROFILES radio buttons that allow the instructor to choose only one NP
windshear profile at time as radio profile buttons are mutually exclusive.

This sliding panel also offers controls to adjust certain NP windshear parameters.

Takeoff scenarios are tuned at MTOW. Landing scenarios are tuned at MLW.

Figure 77 NON-PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR Tab

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 149
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.13.3.1 TAKEOFF PROFILE Section


This section list all available Non-Predictive (NP) windshear takeoff profiles which
are mutually exclusive.

9.13.3.2 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, triggered as A/C reaches Vr less X kts on T/O
Tap this radio button to activate the NP windshear profile described below:
• FAA Windshear Training Aid reference wind model #1.
• Tailwind increasing to XX kt, triggered as A/C reaches Vr less X kts on T/O.

If a takeoff profile is tagged as being a QTG Windshear, then selecting that profile
enables the QTG Intensity button.

The QTG Intensity button causes the simulator environment (A/C gross weight, fuel
weight, CG, temperature, pressure, cg, windshear intensity) to be set as per the
associated QTG Windshear takeoff case.

9.13.3.3 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, triggered T/O rotation


Tap this radio button to activate the NP windshear profile described below:
• FAA Windshear Training Aid reference wind model #1
• Tailwind increasing to XX kt, triggered during T/O rotation.

If a takeoff profile is tagged as being a QTG Windshear, then selecting that profile
enables the QTG Intensity button.

The QTG Intensity button causes the simulator environment (A/C gross weight, fuel
weight, CG, temperature, pressure, CG, windshear intensity) to be set as per the
associated QTG Windshear takeoff case.

9.13.3.4 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, along with varying updrafts, downdrafts, and
crosswind, triggered as A/C climbs through 100 ft AGL on T/O
Tap this radio button to activate the NP windshear profile described below:
• FAA Windshear Training Aid reference wind model #3
• Tailwind increasing to XX kt, along with varying updrafts, downdrafts, and
crosswind, triggered as A/C climbs through 100 ft AGL on T/O.

If a takeoff profile is tagged as being a QTG Windshear, then selecting that profile
enables the QTG Intensity button.

The QTG Intensity button causes the simulator environment (A/C gross weight, fuel
weight, CG, temperature, pressure, CG, windshear intensity) to be set as per the
associated QTG Windshear takeoff case.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 150
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.13.3.5 Tailwind Increasing to XX kt, along with downdraft, triggered as A/C climbs
through 200 ft AGL on T/O
Tap this radio button to activate the NP windshear profile described below:
• FAA Windshear Training Aid reference wind model #2
• Tailwind increasing to XX kt, along with downdraft, triggered as A/C climbs
through 200 ft AGL on T/O.

If a takeoff profile is tagged as being a QTG Windshear, then selecting that profile
enables the QTG Intensity button.

The QTG Intensity button causes the simulator environment (A/C gross weight, fuel
weight, CG, temperature, pressure, CG, windshear intensity) to be set as per the
associated QTG Windshear takeoff case.

9.13.3.6 LANDING PROFILE Section


This section list all available NP windshear landing profiles which are mutually
exclusive.

9.13.3.7 Headwind Increasing to XX kt, switching to XXX kt tailwind, triggered as A/C


descends through 1200 ft AGL during approach
Tap this radio button to activate the NP windshear profile described below:
• FAA Windshear Training Aid reference wind model #4
• Headwind increasing to XX kt, switching to XXX kt tailwind, triggered as A/C
descends through 1200 ft AGL during approach.

If a landing profile is tagged as being a QTG Windshear, then selecting that profile
enables the QTG Intensity button.

The QTG Intensity button causes the simulator environment (A/C gross weight, fuel
weight, CG, temperature, pressure, CG, windshear intensity) to be set as per the
associated QTG Windshear landing case.

9.13.3.8 Tailwind increasing to XX kt, triggered as A/C descends through 300 ft AGL
during approach
Tap this radio button to activate the non-predictive windshear profile described
below:
• FAA Windshear Training Aid reference wind model #1
• Tailwind increasing to XX kt, triggered as A/C descends through 300 ft AGL
during approach.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 151
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

If a landing profile is tagged as being a QTG Windshear, then selecting that profile
enables the QTG Intensity button.

The QTG Intensity button causes the simulator environment (A/C gross weight, fuel
weight, CG, temperature, pressure, CG, windshear intensity) to be set as per the
associated QTG Windshear landing case.

9.13.3.9 Intensity Buttons


The non-predictive windshear intensity buttons are mutually exclusive.

9.13.3.9.1 Light
Tap this button to set the non-predictive windshear profile intensity to light.

9.13.3.9.2 Moderate
Tap this button to set the non-predictive windshear profile intensity to moderate.

9.13.3.9.3 Severe
Tap this button to set the non-predictive windshear profile intensity to severe.

9.13.3.9.4 QTG
Tap this button to indicate that the QTG wind shear will be used when the selected
windshear is activated. This button is only available when a QTG windshear is
selected.

9.13.3.9.5 QTG Flag


A green QTG flag next to a windshear profile indicates that this profile was used for
the QTG tests.

9.13.3.10 Turbulence
This read-only field displays the nominal intensity of the enabled turbulence.

9.13.3.11 Activate NP Windshear


Tap this button to activate the selected non-predictive windshear profile. This button
is disabled when a windshear profile is activated.

9.13.3.12 Clear Windshear


Tap this button to deactivate the active non-predictive windshear profile. This button
is disabled when no windshear profile is activated.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 152
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.13.4 Bounce Landing


Bounce landing generates a strong vertical wind that pushes the aircraft downwards in
such a way that the Landing Gear compression increases higher than normal causing
the aircraft to bounce during the Landing Gear expansion.

As the aircraft is about to land, tap this button to trigger the bounce landing effect.
This toggle button remains illuminated during the effect and automatically turns off if
the:
• Height above the ground is above 50 ft
• Ground speed is less than 10 kts
• Aircraft is repositioning

The reason why the aircraft would go above 50 ft is that it is trying to do a go-around
after the bounced landing. The go-around is the recommended procedure after a
bounced landing.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 153
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.14 RUNWAY CONDITION Sliding Panel


The RUNWAY CONDITIONS sliding panel allows the instructor to affect the
braking action of the aircraft by modifying runway conditions. Runway conditions are
modified by:
• Adding contaminants to the runway surface
• Changing the runway roughness

Runway contamination and roughness can be incorporated into the Automatic


Terminal information Service (ATIS) message.

This sliding panel includes the following tabs:


• CONTAMINATION
• ROUGHNESS

Figure 78 RUNWAY CONDITION Sliding Panel

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 154
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab

9.14.1 CONTAMINATION Tab


This tab features mutually exclusive buttons that allow the instructor to modify the
runway surface.

9.14.1.1 Dry
Tap this button to set dry runway conditions. On a dry runway, normal touchdown
zone rubber residue from landing aircraft will change the coefficient of friction where
the rubber is evident.

This may be further affected if runway contaminants are selected. This button is
disabled when a wet runway is forced due to rain on the runway.

9.14.1.2 Rubber
Tap this button to set rubber on runway. Rubber on runway is independent of the
runway conditions (ice, snow slush and sand). There will only be a friction effect if
selected in combination with Wet runway.

Note: Rubber can also come in the form of a checkbox.

9.14.1.3 WATER – Patchy


Tap this button to add patchy wet conditions on the runway.

This button is disabled when:


• The temperature is below -5 degrees Celsius.
• A wet runway is forced due to rain on the runway.

9.14.1.4 WATER – Wet


Tap this button to add wet conditions on the runway.

This button is disabled when the temperature is below -5 degrees Celsius.

9.14.1.5 WATER – Standing Water > 1/8 in (3 mm)


Tap this button to add 1/8 inch (3 mm) of water on the runway.

This button is disabled when the temperature is below -5 degrees Celsius.

9.14.1.6 ICE - Patchy


Tap this button to add patchy ice conditions on the runway. This button is disabled
when:
• The temperature is above 5 degrees Celsius.
• A wet runway is forced due to rain on the runway.

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 155
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

9.14.1.7 ICE
Tap this button to add a predefined amount of ice on the runway.

This button is disabled when:


• The temperature is above 5 degrees Celsius.
• A wet runway is forced due to rain on the runway.

9.14.1.8 SNOW - Patchy


Tap this button to add patchy snow conditions on the runway.

The patchy snow effect is for visual purposes only.

This button is disabled when a wet runway is forced due to rain on the runway.

9.14.1.9 SNOW
Tap this button to add a pre-defined amount of snow on the runway.

This button is disabled when:


• The temperature is above 5 degrees Celsius.
• A wet runway is forced due to rain on the runway.

9.14.1.10 SLUSH – ¼ in (6mm)


Tap this button to add 1/4 inch (6 mm) of slush on the runway.

This button is disabled when:


• The temperature is lower than -5 degrees Celsius or above 5 degrees Celsius.
• A wet runway is forced due to rain on the runway.

9.14.1.11 SLUSH – ½ in (13 mm)


Tap this button to add 1/2 inch (13 mm) of slush on the runway.

This button is disabled when:


• The temperature is lower than -5 degrees Celsius or above 5 degrees Celsius.
• A wet runway is forced due to rain on the runway.

9.14.2 ROUGHNESS Tab


This tab includes a slider control to adjust the runway roughness between 1 to 5.
(1 = Smooth and 5 = Rough).

REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab


21 Mar 2019
Page 156
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel

10. INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel


The INSTRUCTOR STATION sliding panel allows the instructor to:
• Set the Unit of Measure (UOM) of various parameters
• Change the IOS workspace configuration
• End the IOS session

To access the INSTRUCTOR STATION sliding panel, tap on the Expand button
located at the right side of the Control Board.

Figure 79 INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel

INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding


Panel
21 Mar 2019
Page 157
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 80 Control Board Expand Button


10.1 PREFERENCES Tab
The PREFERENCES Tab includes dropdown buttons that allow the instructor to set
the unit of measure of:
• Force units
• Aircraft weight
• Environment units

10.1.1 Force Units


Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then tap to set the Force Units to
either:

Lbf Sets the force units to lbf

daN Sets the force units to daN

10.1.2 A/C Weight Units


Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then tap to set the aircraft weight Unit
of Measure to either:

Kg Sets the aircraft weight units to kilograms (kg).


(In the case of liquid volume, liters will be used).
lb Sets the aircraft weight units to pounds (lb).
(In the case of liquid volume, gal, qt and pt will be used).

INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding


Panel
21 Mar 2019
Page 158
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel

10.1.3 Environment Units


Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then tap to set the Environment Units
to Metric or Imperial.

10.1.3.1 Metric
Metric sets the environment units as defined below:
• QFE - hPa/mb
• QNH - hPa/mb
• Temperature - deg C
• RVR - m
• Visibility - km
• Wind - kt
• Runway Contamination Depth - mm
• Cloud Height - ft

10.1.3.2 Imperial
Imperial sets the environment units as defined below:
• QFE - inHg
• QNH - inHg
• Temperature - deg C
• RVR - ft
• Visibility - sm
• Wind - kt
• Runway Contamination Depth - in
• Cloud Height - ft

10.1.4 Automatic to Reference Airport


Tap this checkbox to set the unit of measure parameters to match those of the selected
reference airport.
10.2 CONFIGURATION Tab
The CONFIGURATION tab allows the instructor to view parameters of the current
IOS configuration and change the current IOS to another configuration.

INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding


Panel
21 Mar 2019
Page 159
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

10.2.1 Change Configuration Button


Tap this button to display the CONFIGURATIONS page which allows the instructor
to:
• View all the IOS configurations
• Load a specific IOS configuration by tapping on the associated Load button.

Figure 81 IOS CONFIGURATIONS Selection Page


10.3 End Session
Tap this button to:
• End the current session
• Return the IOS Main Page
• Select another Configuration by tapping the Change button.

INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding


Panel
21 Mar 2019
Page 160
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding Panel

Figure 82 IOS Main Page

INSTRUCTOR STATION Sliding


Panel
21 Mar 2019
Page 161
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11. Control Board Footer


The Control Board footer is designed to provide quick access to common functions
regardless of the panel or sliding panel currently displayed.

Figure 83 Footer

11.1 FLIGHT FREEZE


FLIGHT FREEZE is a toggle type button that allows the instructor to
activate/deactivate the flight freeze mode.

Tap this button to activate the flight freeze mode. When Flight Freeze is activated, it
freezes:
• All flight parameters such as:
o Pitch
o Bank
o Heading
o Airspeed
• Altitude and position
• Motion system
o Except for washout as predicted by the flight conditions at the moment
freeze was activated.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 163
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

A flight freeze also decreases the sound level.

Note: During flight freeze, most simulated aircraft systems remain unaffected and
continue to follow crew actions and malfunction insertions except for the
effects of frozen altitude and position parameters.

It is important to understand that when flight freeze is activated, tapping the FLIGHT
FREEZE toggle button to de-activate the flight freeze mode will not cause violent
control or motion movements:
• Regardless of whether the autopilot is activated or not and,
• Independent of the control positions at the time of unfreeze.

During a reposition, the FLIGHT FREEZE button is disabled until the reposition or
flight trim is completed. A message Reposition in Progress is displayed in the button.

Making changes to parameters such as: temperature, pressure, wind and cloud altitude
ramping while flight freeze is activated will only take effect once flight freeze is de-
activated.
11.2 Resets
The Resets button allows the instructor to perform the following resets:
• Environment Reset
• ISA & Winds Reset
• Systems Reset
• Total Reset
• Session Reset
• More…

Tap the Resets button to display the Resets roll up menu and then tap on the desired
reset to activate it.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 164
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

Figure 84 Resets Roll up Menu (Typical)

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 165
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.2.1 Environment
Tap the Environment button to reset the environment as follows:
• Dry runway
• Rubber on runway
• Runway roughness 2
• Visibility 40 nm
• RVR 9900 ft
• No clouds
• No fog
• No rain
• No hail
• No falling snow
• No winter scene
• No sand
• No lightning
• No thunder
• No storm clouds
• No icing
• Time of day speed up factor reset

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

This button is disabled when all above conditions are met.

Note: When any of these conditions are not met, the message Non STD
Environment will appear in the warning window. With respect to CAVOK
condition the message will be triggered when conditions are below those
of CAVOK definition.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 166
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.2.2 ISA & Winds


Tap the ISA & Winds button to set the atmosphere to the following ISA standard
conditions and winds:
• Sea Level Baro Press 1013.2 mb
• Intermediate Altitude 18 000 ft
• Upper Level Altitude 36 089 ft
• Temp Lapse Rate -1.98 deg C/1000ft
• Sea Level Temp 15 deg C
• Intermediate Temp -21.0 deg C (at 18000 ft)
• Upper Level Temp -56.5 deg C (at 36089 ft)
• Airfield Wind 360/0 deg mag/kt
• Intermediate Wind 360/0 deg mag/kt
• Upper Level Wind 360/0 deg mag/kt
• No Gust
• Base Turbulence
• No Windshear
• No Microburst

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

This button is disabled when all above conditions are met.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 167
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.2.3 Systems
Tap the Systems button to reset all the systems under the Reset Systems branch.

Note: The number and type of resettable systems varies with IOS configuration.

Tapping this button also resets temperatures to normal operating values unless:
• A malfunction is active
• A specific system is intentionally excluded

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

Figure 85 Systems Reset

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 168
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.2.4 Total
Tap this button to execute a total reset that will reset the following parameters:
• Crash Reset (if Crashed) On
• Clear Malfunctions On
• Clear Failed Stations On
• Engine Exceedance On
• Fuel Used Indicator On

Tapping the Reset button also automatically performs a Systems Reset.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

Figure 86 Total Reset

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 169
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.2.5 Session
Tap this button to execute a session reset. Upon tapping this button, a Reset Session
popup menu appears to confirm the Session reset operation.

A session reset performs the following:


• End Lesson
• Crash Inhibit
• Brake Temp Reset Inhibit not active
• RAAS Inhibit not active (optional)
• Environment Reset
• Standard Atmosphere and Winds
• Turbulence enable buttons to default settings
• Surface friction button to default setting
• End Debrief Recording
• No TCAS Traffic
• No GATES
• No Ground Traffic
• Time of Day Set to Day
• Track erase for map and plots
• Sound 100%
• Clears all flight situation captures
• Clears all snapshots (snapshot/setup option)

Tapping the Session button also automatically performs a Total reset (which includes
a Systems Reset).

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 170
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

Figure 87 Session Reset

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 171
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.2.6 More…
Tap the More… button to display the RESETS sliding panel.

11.2.6.1 RESETS Sliding Panel


The RESETS Sliding Panel allows the instructor to perform:
• Session Reset
• Total Reset
• Systems Reset
• Individual System Reset

Figure 88 RESETS Sliding Panel

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 172
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.2.6.1.1 End Lesson


Tap this button to end the current in progress lesson plan. This causes the master
index panel to be displayed. This button is disabled when there is no active lesson
plan.

11.2.6.1.2 Crash Inhibit


Tap this button to prevent a crash from occurring when crash limits are exceeded.
This means that the simulation will continue through a crash.

When this button is not selected, in the event of crash situation, the simulation will
freeze, except for:
• Advisory crashes or exceedance advisories
o Where only the Crash/Advisory/Exceedance panel appears, but the
simulation does not freeze

The following parameters are monitored to detect an aircraft crash condition:


• Excessive rate of descent at touchdown
• Wing strike on ground (advisory)
• Tail strike (advisory)
• Landing gear not down and locked at touchdown (advisory)
• Excessive side force on ground
• Excessive speed
• Excessive G force
• Excessive Mach
• Ground contact off runway (advisory)
• Midair collision
• Terrain/Obstacle impact
• Structural impact off runway
• Excessive speed (> 75 kt) off runway
• Excessive flight acceleration in air (exceedance)
• Excessive jerk (rate of change of acceleration) in air (exceedance)
• Unstable flight acceleration in air (exceedance)
• Excessive flight acceleration on ground (exceedance)
• Excessive jerk (rate of change of acceleration) on ground (exceedance)
• Unstable flight acceleration on ground (exceedance)
Control Board Footer
21 Mar 2019
Page 173
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

• Excessive engine thrust during pushback


• Excessive engine thrust or brakes applied during pushback (option)

This button is disabled if the aircraft has already crashed.

The Crash Inhibit will inhibit crash detection of all crashes with the exception of
Excessive Rate of Descent at Touchdown and Excessive Side Force on Ground.

The Excessive Rate of Descent at Touchdown and Excessive Side Force on Ground
cannot be inhibited because it is there to prevent excessive motion jerks and large hits
that could injure personnel during training.

When Crash Inhibit is activated, the Excessive Rate of Descent at Touchdown trigger
threshold is increased to allow harder landings while still maintaining the protection
as described above.

11.2.6.1.3 Brake Temp Reset Inhibit


Tap this button to inhibit the resetting of the brake and tire temperature whenever a
reposition is performed.

11.2.6.1.4 Environment
Refer to paragraph 11.2.1.

11.2.6.1.5 Standard Atmos & Winds


Refer to paragraph 11.2.2.

11.2.6.1.6 Crash
In all instances below for advisory crashes and exceedance advisories, the following
statements apply:
• Crash Reset button does not appear.
• Crash/Advisory/Exceedance page is cleared automatically after 30 seconds.

In all instances below for regular crashes, the following statements apply, EXCEPT
where indicated otherwise:
• Flight Freeze button is dark until a Crash Reset or reposition is performed.
• Crash Reset clears the Crash/Advisory/Exceedance page and performs a takeoff
reposition.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 174
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

Tap this button to reset the simulator as follows:


• Excessive rate of descent at touchdown
• Wing strike on ground (advisory)
• Tail strike (advisory)
• Landing gear not down and locked at touchdown (advisory)
• Excessive side force on ground
• Excessive speed:
o Clears the Crash/Advisory/Exceedance panel and,
o Releases Flight Freeze
o Crash condition will not be monitored for a period of 30 seconds after a
Crash Reset.
• Excessive G force:
o Clears the Crash/Advisory/Exceedance panel and,
o Releases Flight Freeze
o Crash condition will not be monitored for a period of 30 seconds after a
Crash Reset
• Excessive Mach:
o Clears the Crash/Advisory/Exceedance panel and,
o Releases Flight Freeze
o Crash condition will not be monitored for a period of 30 seconds after a
Crash Reset
• Ground contact off runway (advisory)
• Midair collision:
o Clears the Crash/Advisory/Exceedance panel and,
o Releases Flight Freeze
o Crash condition will not be monitored for a period of 30 seconds after a
Crash Reset
• Terrain/Obstacle impact
• Structural impact off runway
• Excessive speed (> 75 kt) off runway
• Excessive flight acceleration in air (exceedance)
• Excessive jerk (rate of change of acceleration) in air (exceedance)
• Unstable flight acceleration in air (exceedance)

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 175
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

• Excessive flight acceleration on ground (exceedance)


• Excessive jerk (rate of change of acceleration) on ground (exceedance)
• Unstable flight acceleration on ground (exceedance)
• Excessive engine thrust during pushback
• Excessive engine thrust or brakes applied during pushback (option)

This button is disabled if the aircraft has not crashed. When selected, the button
remains active for 2 seconds.

11.2.6.1.7 Clear Malfunctions


Tap this button to clear all active and armed malfunctions.

This button is disabled if there are no active or armed malfunctions.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.8 Clear Failed Stations


Tap this button to clear all stations that were failed by the instructor.

This button is disabled when there are no failed stations.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.9 Engine Exceedance


Tap this button to clear the Engine.

Displays exceedances red box (N1, N2, and EGT) by moving the exceedances into
the next DEU flight leg.

This is achieved by setting the airspeed over 80 knots for 2 seconds.

This button is disabled if engine exceedance has not occurred.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.10 Fuel Used Indicator


Tap this button to reset the Fuel Used indicator. Tapping this button causes it to
illuminate for two seconds.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 176
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.2.6.1.11 Air Conditioning


Tap this button to reset the air conditioning temperature to normal.

This button is disabled when the air conditioning temperature is normal.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.12 Hydraulics
Tap this button to reset hydraulic fluid quantities and hydraulic oil temperature to
normal operating values.

This button is disabled when hydraulic fluid quantities and hydraulic oil temperature
are at normal operating values.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.13 Fuel Temp.


Tap this button to reset the fuel temperature to ambient temperature.

This button is disabled when the fuel temperature is at ambient temperature.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.14 Engine EGT/ITT


Tap this button to reset the Engine Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) or Interstage
Turbine Temperature (ITT), as applicable, to normal operating values.

This button is disabled when the Engine EGT or ITT is at a steady state.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.15 Oxygen
Tap this button to refill the oxygen bottles.

This button is disabled if the oxygen bottles are full.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 177
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.2.6.1.16 Tire Pressure


Tap this button to reset the tire pressure to normal and the brake temperature to the
ambient temperature.

This button is disabled when tire pressure is within the normal operating range and
the brake temperature is at ambient temperature.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.17 Brake Temp


Tap this button to reset the brake temperature to the ambient temperature.

This button is disabled when the brake temperature is at ambient temperature.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.18 Electrics
Tap this button to reset the following elements to normal:
• Recharge Batteries
• IDG Connect
• IDG Oil
• Stow RAT

This button is disabled when all above items are reset to normal.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.19 Recharge Batteries


Tap this button to recharge batteries.

This button is disabled when all batteries are charged.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.20 IDG Connect


Tap this button to reset the disconnected IDGs. This button is disabled when the IDG
is connected. Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 178
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.2.6.1.21 IDG Oil


Tap this button to reset the IDG oil quantity and temperature to normal operating
values. This button is disabled when the IDG oil quantity and temperature are normal.
Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.22 Stow RAT


Tap this button to stow the Ram Air Turbine (RAT). This button is disabled when the
RAT is stowed. Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.23 Engine Oil


Tap this button to reset the engine oil quantities and engine oil temperature to normal
operating values.

This button is disabled when the engine oil tank quantities and engine oil temperature
are within normal operating values.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.24 Fire Bottles


Tap this button to refill all fire extinguishing bottles.

This button is disabled if the fire extinguishing bottles are filled.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.2.6.1.25 WTB
Tap this button to reset the Wing Tip brakes (WTB) to normal.

This button is disabled if the WTB are normal.

Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 179
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.3 Freezes
The Freezes button allows the instructor to perform the following freezes:
• Total
• Position
• Fuel

Tap the Freezes button to display the Freezes roll up menu and then tap on the desired
freeze to activate.

Active freezes are shown in red.

Figure 89 Freezes Roll up Menu

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 180
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.3.1 Total Freeze


Tap this toggle button to activate/deactivate total freeze.

When total freeze is activated, it freezes:


• All flight parameters such as:
o Pitch
o Bank
o Heading
o Airspeed
• Altitude and position
• Flight controls:
o Regardless of whether the autopilot is activated or not (control loading is
not frozen)
• Motion system
o Except for washout as predicted by the flight conditions at the time freeze
was activated
• All aircraft systems:
o Crew selections are no longer reflected in changing indications except
where a selector directly drives an indicator, for example frequency
selectors

During total freeze:


• The communication system continues to function
• The sound level decreases

It is important to understand that when total freeze is activated, tapping the Total
Freeze toggle button to de-activate the total freeze mode will not cause violent control
or motion movements:
• Regardless of whether the autopilot is activated or not,
• Independent of the control positions at the time of unfreeze

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 181
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.3.2 Position Freeze


Tap this toggle button to freeze/unfreeze the aircraft at the current geographical
position.

During freeze, the aircraft flies normally.

During a reposition, the freeze button is disabled until the reposition or flight trim is
completed.

11.3.3 Fuel Freeze


Tap this toggle button to activate/deactivate fuel freeze.

When Fuel Freeze is activated:


• All aircraft instruments continue to indicate normally.
o Except the fuel quantity indicators, as these remain inactive because no fuel
is consumed by the aircraft during Fuel Freeze.
• All other aircraft systems remain unaffected except for the effects of fuel freeze.
• Refuel remains possible.

During reposition, the freeze button is disabled until the reposition or flight trim is
completed.

11.3.4 More…
Tap the More… button to display the FREEZES sliding panel.

11.3.4.1 FREEZES Sliding Panel


The FREEZES sliding panel allows the instructor to perform
• Total freeze
• Flight freeze
• Altitude freeze
• Position freeze
• Heading freeze
• Fuel freeze
• Attitude freeze

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 182
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

• Airspeed freeze
• Link FLT FRZ to a specific button in the cockpit

Note: The Link Flight Freeze (FLT FRZ) button depending on the IOS
configuration can be linked to the Flight Deck Door or any other cockpit
button.

Figure 90 FREEZES Sliding Panel

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 183
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.3.4.2 Total
Refer to paragraph 11.3.1 Total Freeze.

11.3.4.3 Flight
Refer to paragraph 11.1 FLIGHT FREEZE.

11.3.4.4 Altitude
Tap this toggle button to activate/deactivate aircraft altitude freeze.

When Altitude is activated, no other parameters are affected except altitude.

During reposition, the freeze button is disabled until the reposition or flight trim is
completed.

11.3.4.5 Position
Refer to paragraph 11.3.2 Position Freeze.

11.3.4.6 Heading
Tap this toggle button to activate/deactivate aircraft heading freeze.

When heading freeze is activated, no other parameters are affected except heading.

During a reposition, the freeze button is disabled until the reposition or flight trim is
completed.

11.3.4.7 Fuel
Refer to paragraph 11.3.3 Fuel Freeze.

11.3.4.8 Attitude
Tap this toggle button to activate/deactivate aircraft attitude freeze.

When attitude freeze is activated, no other parameters are affected except aircraft
attitude.

During a reposition, the freeze button is disabled until the reposition or flight trim is
completed.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 184
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.3.4.9 Airspeed
Tap this toggle button to activate/deactivate aircraft airspeed freeze.

When aircraft airspeed freeze is activated, no other parameters are affected except
aircraft airspeed.

During a reposition, the freeze button is disabled until the reposition or flight trim is
completed.

11.3.4.10 Link FLT FRZ to Rain Repellent


Tap this button to allow the Rain Repellent button in the cockpit to be used as a flight
freeze control.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 185
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.4 Sim Controls


The Sim Controls button allows the instructor to control and monitor the status of
various simulator systems such as:
• Visual
• Motion
• Control Loading
• Prime Smoke
• Ceiling Lights

Tap the Sim Controls button to display the Sim Controls roll up menu and view the
status of various systems.

Figure 91 Sim Controls Roll up Menu

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 186
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.4.1 Visual
Tap this button to activate/deactivate the visual system. This button has two status:
• Visual system On
• Visual system Off

11.4.2 Motion
Tap this button to start the process of activating or deactivating the motion system.
This button has two status:
• Motion system On
• Motion system Off

A Motion system status light indicator has the following statuses:

Status Color Response


Failed Red Selection ignored
Not ready White Selection ignored
Ready Blue Changes to starting
On Green Changes to stopping
Starting Flashing green Changes to stopping
Stopping Flashing blue Selection ignored

This button is disabled if the motion system is not running.

11.4.3 Control Loading


Tap this button to start the process of activating or deactivating the Control Loading
system. This button has two status:
• Control Loading system On
• Control Loading system Off

A Control Loading system status light indicator has the following statuses:

Status Color Response


Failed Red Selection ignored
Not ready White Selection ignored
Ready Blue Changes to starting
On Green Changes to stopping
Starting Flashing green Changes to stopping
Stopping Flashing blue Selection ignored

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 187
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.4.4 Prime Smoke


This button start the process of activating or deactivating the Smoke Generator
system. Once the Smoke generator system is primed, a smoke malfunction can be
triggered.

This button has two status:


• Smoke Generator system On
• Smoke Generator system Off

From the Normal state, tap this button to prime the Smoke Generator system, while
the system is priming a light indicator flashes green and when the system is ready the
light indicator illuminates steady.

11.4.5 Ceiling Lights


Tap this button to illuminate/extinguish the flight compartment ceiling lights. This
button has two status:
• Ceiling lights On
• Ceiling lights Off

11.4.6 More…
Tap the More… button to display the SIMULATOR CONTROLS sliding panel.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 188
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.4.6.1 SIMULATOR CONTROLS Sliding Panel


The SIMULATOR CONTROLS sliding panel provides additional simulator controls.
It includes the following tabs:
• MOTION & CONTROL LOADING
• MESSAGE LOG

Figure 92 SIMULATOR CONTROLS Sliding Panel

11.4.6.1.1 MOTION & CONTROL LOADING Tab


This tab includes light indicators providing a status of the Motion and Control
Loading systems as described in paragraphs 11.4.2 and 11.4.3 and Reset buttons.

11.4.6.1.1.1 Failure Reset


Tap this button to attempt resetting all Motion and Control Loading systems warning
and failure messages. Tapping this button causes it to illuminate for two seconds.

11.4.6.1.1.2 Interlock Reset


Tap this button to attempt resetting all Motion and Control Loading systems interlock
messages. Interlock messages represent the status of safety devices that prevent the
activation of motion and control loading systems. Such safety devices installed at
strategic locations on the simulator such as Visual Access Doors and Cockpit Door
will trigger the interlock messages when the device sensors are not in the required
state. When selected, the button remains active for two seconds.

11.4.6.1.2 MESSAGE LOG Tab


This tab displays a limited set of Motion and Control Loading error, warning and
specifically, interlock messages, which are useful to the instructor.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 189
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.5 Volume
The Volume button allows the instructor to control the volume of the simulation
sound.

Adjusting the volume level can be changed instantly in either one of two ways:
• Input text field
• Slider Control

To adjust the volume:


1) Tap on the input text field, this will display a keypad.
2) Use the keypad to manually enter a specific value.
Or,
3) Use the slider control to adjust the volume between a minimum value.

A Mute button mutes the simulation sound.

Figure 93 Volume Roll up Menu

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 190
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.6 Reposition
The Reposition button allows the instructor to reposition the aircraft to a preset
position with respect to the reference runway.

To reposition the aircraft to an alternate preset position:


1) Tap this button to display the Reposition roll up menu.
2) Tap on the desired preset position.
3) Tap the Reposition button to activate the repositioning of the aircraft.

All Preset positions are defined in the AIRPORT REPOSITION Tab in the AIRPORT
REPOSITION sliding panel in paragraph 9.2. Tapping the More… button displays
the AIRPORT REPOSITION sliding panel.

Figure 94 Reposition Roll up Menu

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 191
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.7 Weather Presets


The WX Presets button allows the instructor to change the cloud and visibility
conditions at the reference airport according to EASA / FAA standards (as
applicable).

To change the cloud and visibility conditions:


1) Tap this button to display the WX Preset roll up menu
2) Tap on the desired WX preset button

All WX Presets are defined in the Weather Presets Section of the CLOUDS sliding
panel paragraph 7.2.4
.
Note: The name of this roll up menu located under the icon varies with the
current WX preset selection.

Tapping the More… button displays the Advanced – Weather Region page.

Figure 95 WX Presets Roll up Menu

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 192
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.8 Capture Flight


The Capture Flight button allows the instructor to create a flight capture into the
indicated capture slot.

The button is disabled if a capture, recall, reposition, or slew is active or if the aircraft
is moving on ground with a speed in excess of the VR speed.
11.9 Print
The Print button allows the instructor to:
• Print the current page being displayed on screen
• View printing options

To view additional print options:


• Tap the Print button to display the roll up menu
• Tap More… to display the PRINT OPTIONS panel.

Figure 96 Print Roll Up Menu

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 193
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.9.1 More…
Tap the More… button to display the PRINT OPTIONS sliding panel.

11.9.1.1 PRINT OPTIONS Sliding Panel


The PRINT OPTIONS sliding panel consists of checkboxes to select the page to be
printed.

Tap on the screen checkbox to select the screen to be printed, then tap on the Print
button to print.

11.9.1.1.1 Inverted Mode


The Inverted Mode checkbox determines two print modes:

Checked Black and white printing mode


Unchecked Color printing mode

Figure 97 PRINT OPTIONS Sliding Panel

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 194
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.10 Speed Up
The Speed Up button allows the instructor to accelerate or slowdown the simulation
time. To do so,
• Tap on the Speed Up button to display the Speed Up menu, and then
• Tap on the desired Speed Up factor.

Figure 98 Speed Up Roll Up Menu


11.11 Clear All Malf.
The Clear All Malfunction button allows the instructor to clear all armed or active
malfunctions. These are indicated by a red badge overlaid onto the Clear All Malf
button.

To clear all malfunctions:


• Tap on this button.
• A CLEAR ALL MALFUNCTIONS confirmation popup is displayed.
• Tap Confirm to clear or Cancel to retain malfunctions.

This button is disabled if no malfunction is armed or active. When selected, the


button remains active for 2 seconds.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 195
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.12 Notifications
The Notifications button allows the instructor to view the notifications of events as
they occur during the simulation. Each notification message displayed on screen has a
color-coded icon depending on the severity of the message.

When a new event occurs, the associated notification message is displayed for five
seconds. As additional notifications are occurring during the simulation period, these
are stacked on top of each other.

Notifications that are no longer relevant are automatically removed from the listing.

A red badge on the Notifications button shows the number of active messages. Tap on
the button to display the list of active notifications.

Figure 99 Notifications

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 196
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.13 Help Rollup Menu


The Help rollup menu allows the instructor to:
• Display or hide the help associated to the active sliding panel.
• Create a zip file that can be sent to CAE personnel for assistance.

Figure 100 Help Rollup Menu

11.13.1 Help
Tapping the Help button displays the help for the active or selected panel or sliding
panel. Available help is displayed in the form of bubbles with numbers on the
workspace.

To view the help associated to the numbered bubble:


• Tap on the bubble on the Help workspace
• This will automatically display the available help for the numbered bubble on
the left side of the screen.

If no selection is made within 2-3 seconds after help mode is activated, a popup
describing the functionality of the current panel appears.

Figure 101 HELP Panel

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 197
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.13.2 Send Feedback


Send Feedback is a function that allows the instructor to create a help zip file on the
Op Server that can then be sent to CAE personnel for analysis and/or assistance.

Tapping on Send Feedback:


• Creates a help zip file that contains:
o Print screen images of the IOS display screens.
o Log files
• Displays the Send Us Feedback pop up.
• Provides basic image editing tools.
o Allowing the instructor to annotate each image.

11.13.2.1 Send Us Feedback Pop Up


This pop up as shown in Figure 102 contains input text fields allowing the instructor
to enter a brief Subject name, detailed message of the problem and the name of the
person creating the help zip file.

Note: The name of the Subject should be brief as the text entered in this field
will serve as the prefix of the help zip file name.

11.13.2.1.1 Keyboard Icon


Tap the keyboard icon to display/hide the pop up keyboard.

11.13.2.1.2 Annotate Screenshots


Tap this button to display the basic image editing tools that will allow the instructor
to annotate the selected screenshot image.

The basic image editing tools include a pencil tool, an erase tool as well as a set of
pencil tool colors.

To add a markup on the image, the instructor selects the pencil tool and use his finger
to touch the screen and make his markups.

11.13.2.1.3 Send
Tap the Send button to initiate the process of creating the help zip file. During the file
creation process, a Feedback popup as shown in Figure 103 is displayed informing
the user that prints screens and log files are being collected.

Once the help zip file is completed, a Thanks for you feed back popup as shown in
Figure 104 appears allowing the instructor to view the file and its content.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 198
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

Figure 102 Send Us Feedback Pop Up

Figure 103 Sending Feedback Pop Up

Figure 104 Viewing the Feedback Data File

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 199
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.13.2.2 Help Zip File Content


The content of a help zip file created with Send Feedback includes IOS print screens,
log files and configuration layout files.

Figure 105 Help Zip File

Figure 106 Help Zip File Content Example

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 200
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Control Board Footer

11.14 Workspace
The Workspace button allows the instructor to choose which application workspace
will be displayed on the current monitor.

To display a specific workspace:


1) Tap on the Control Board footer Workspace button. This displays the Workspace
roll up menu.
2) Tap on the desired button to select. Some of the main workspaces can include:
o Control Board
o Map
o Lesson Plan

The Workspace roll up menu includes additional buttons such as:


• Maintenance, to toggle to the Maintenance mode and,
• Close Workspace Manager

Figure 107 Workspace Roll Up Menu

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 201
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

11.14.1 Maintenance
Tap on the Maintenance button to display the Maintenance pages on the current
monitor.

11.14.2 Instr. Repeaters


Tap on the Instr. Repeaters button to display the Instrument Repeater workspace on
the current monitor.

11.14.3 Lesson Profile


Tap on the Lesson Profile button to display the Lesson Plan Profile workspace on the
current monitor.

11.14.4 Map
Tap on the Map button to display the Map workspace on the current monitor.

11.14.5 Control Board


Tap on the Control Board button to display the Control Board workspace on the
current monitor.

11.14.6 Advanced
Tap the Advanced button to display an advanced tool bar on the left side of the
current monitor.

This tool bar allows the instructor to quickly access some parameters usually found
on the Control board such as Aircraft, Position, Environment parameters, but it also
provides access to additional pages such as Intruders and Communication.

Control Board Footer


21 Mar 2019
Page 202
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Maintenance Pages

12. Maintenance Pages


The Maintenance pages are intended to maintenance personnel only to allow them to
carry out various simulator maintenance tasks.

Figure 108 Maintenance Pages

Maintenance Pages
21 Mar 2019
Page 203
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
INSTRUMENT REPEATER Workspace

13. INSTRUMENT REPEATER Workspace


The INSTRUMENT REPEATER workspace allows the instructor to select an
instrument in the cockpit to be displayed on the current monitor.

Note: Depending on the IOS configuration, this workspace can be programmed


to view and repeat several cockpit instruments.

The INSTRUMENT REPEATER workspace features:


• A Map Header (identical to the Map workspace header)
• A Main Section
• A Map Footer (identical to the Control board footer)

Figure 109 INSTRUMENT REPEATER Workspace


13.1 Main Section
The main section of the Instrument Repeater workspace consists of:
• An INSTRUMENTS Tab
• An Instrument view mode section

INSTRUMENT REPEATER
Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 205
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

13.1.1 INSTRUMENTS Tab


This tab lists all the available instruments from the cockpit that can be displayed on
the instrument view mode.

13.1.2 Instrument View Mode Section


This section of the Instrument Repeater workspace displays the instrument selected in
the INSTRUMENTS Tab.

INSTRUMENT REPEATER
Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 206
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Lesson Plan Profile Workspace

14. Lesson Plan Profile Workspace


The Lesson Plan Profile workspace provides a graphical representation of all the
training elements included in the selected lesson. The training elements such as
training phases and associated steps are presented over a flight profile (amber line)
that is defined in the CAE Slick web-based lesson plan editor.

Unlike the LESSON PLAN Tab in the Control Board, that shows the lesson training
phases and steps in two scrollable sections, the Lesson Plan Profile workspace
provides an alternate mean to show the same lesson elements.

The Lesson Plan Profile workspace allows instructor to see at a quick glance most, if
not all the training elements included in the lesson plan. This of course is driven by
the size of the lesson.

The Lesson Plan Profile workspace features:


• A Map Header (identical to the Map workspace header)
• A Main Section which is divided in two view modes:
o Canvas
o List
• A Map Footer (identical to the Control board footer)

Figure 110 Lesson Plan Profile Workspace

Lesson Plan Profile Workspace


21 Mar 2019
Page 207
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

14.1 Main Section


The main section of the Lesson Plan Profile workspace consists of:
• A Canvas view mode
• A List view mode
• A Time section
• A Time line
• Buttons

14.1.1 Canvas View Mode


The Canvas view mode shows all the training phases of the lesson plan along with all
the steps associated to each training phase.

This view mode is scrollable from left to right and vice versa to allow the viewing of
all lesson plan elements over the flight profile.

To view the details of a lesson step:


• Tap on the desired step, this:
o Highlights the step item
o Causes a checkmark to appear
o Displays the list view mode which shows the step details

At this point, tapping on the lesson step again would execute the step (i.e. Tap once to
select, tap again to execute).

14.1.2 Lesson Elements


Note, Sim Condition and Malfunction elements in a lesson plan each:
• Have a step sequence number that indicates to which training phase they belong.
• Are color coded.

The color code of these elements is:

Lesson Plan Profile Workspace


21 Mar 2019
Page 208
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Lesson Plan Profile Workspace

The color of lesson plan steps shown in the Canvas view mode is identical to those
shown in the Control Board LESSON PLAN tab.

Freeplay and Nested lesson steps do not have a step sequence number as these can be
triggered at any time in the lesson plan.

14.1.3 Runtime Statuses


Runtime statuses in the Canvas mode are:

Step not selected

Step selected

Step executing instructions

Step is completed

14.1.4 Time Line


The time line provides an indication of the total time of the lesson.

14.1.5 List View Mode


The List view mode is a vertical scrollable section that allows the instructor to see the
same lesson elements found on the canvas. The List view mode operates just like the
LESSON PLAN Tab in the Control Board.

14.1.6 Time Section


The Time section shows the lesson plan total estimated time and the elapse time. It
also provides an indication that shows whether the execution of the lesson is ahead of
time or running behind.
• + indicates ahead of time
• - indicates running behind

Lesson Plan Profile Workspace


21 Mar 2019
Page 209
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

14.1.7 Buttons
The main section of the Lesson Plan Profile workspace includes the following
buttons.

14.1.7.1 Lesson List

Tap the Lesson List icon to display all available lessons.

14.1.7.2 List View Mode Show/Hide


The List view mode can be shown or hidden on the Lesson Plan Profile workspace.

Tap this toggle icon to hide the List view mode.

Tap this toggle icon to show the List view mode.

14.1.7.3 List View Mode Expand/Collapse


The level of information that is shown for each step is controlled by two buttons:

Tap this button to expand the List view mode and increase the information
level of detail shown for each step.

Tap this button to retract the List view mode and decrease the information
level of detail shown for each step.

14.1.7.4 End Lesson


The End Lesson button is displayed when a lesson is running.

When a lesson is running, tap this button to end the current lesson and return to the
Lesson Plan selection screen.

14.1.7.5 Step-by-Step
Tap this button to run the lesson steps in a step-by-step fashion.

For each step to be issued, requires a confirmation from the instructor which is done
by tapping the Execute button.

14.1.7.6 Execute
Tap this button to execute the selected lesson step.

Lesson Plan Profile Workspace


21 Mar 2019
Page 210
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15. Map Workspace


The Map workspace provides a 2D/3D representation of the virtual space which is
intended to enhance situational awareness.

To display the Map Workspace:


1) Tap on the Control Board footer Workspace button.
o This displays a Workspace rollup menu
2) From the available workspaces displayed, tap on Map to select.

The Map workspace features a:


• Map Header
• Main Section
• Right Toolbar
• Map Footer

Figure 111 Map Workspace

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 211
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.1 Map Header


The Map header features a series of tabs that groups various type of information
relating to the aircraft. Information such as:
• Weight & Balance
• Performance Data
• Altitude, Heading, IAS
• Communications
• Armed and Active Malfunctions
• Current Time
• Lesson and exercise information

Figure 112 Map Header

Figure 113 Weight & Balance

Figure 114 Performance Data

Figure 115 Altitude, Heading and IAS

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 212
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

Figure 116 Communications

Figure 117 Malfunctions


15.2 Main Section
The Main section of the Map workspace is a 2D/3D representation of the virtual
space. This section shows the aircraft position, flight path and environment
components such as:
• Other active entities
• Navaids
• Airports
• Weather elements such as storms

Figure 118 Main Section

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 213
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.2.1 Icons
There are two main icons on the main section:
• Wind barb indicating the wind direction at the aircraft.
• Compass showing the Compass
o Tapping on the compass icon toggles north up/heading up.

Figure 119 Main Section Icons

15.2.2 Radial Menus


There are several types of radial menus used on the main section. These are
accessible by tapping on the main section of the map.

15.2.2.1 Cursor Radial Menu


The Cursor Radial menu allows the instructor to:
• Place a spider web around the cursor location.
• Reposition the aircraft to a specific location on the map.
• Add a storm to a specific location on the map.
• Add an entity to a specific location on the map.

To display the Cursor Radial Menu at a specific location on the map:


1) Tap the desired location on the map section.
2) This places the cursor at the tapped location.
3) The Cursor Radial menu buttons are displayed.

Figure 120 Cursor Radial Menu

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 214
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.2.2.2 Aircraft Radial Menu


The Aircraft Radial menu allows the instructor to place a spider web around the
aircraft.

To display the Aircraft Radial menu:


1) On the main section of the map, tap on the aircraft.
2) Then tap on the Attach Spiderweb button to display a spider web around the
aircraft.

Figure 121 Aircraft Radial Menu

15.2.2.3 Navaid Radial Menu


The Navaid Radial menu allows the instructor to:
• Reposition the aircraft above the navaid while keeping its altitude and heading
and display fail navaid station. For navaids having multiple components such as
VOR-DME, it is possible to fail only one system.
• Reset a failed station
o The Fail Station button is changed to Reset Station when the failure is
active. The navaid icon on the map indicates the station status failed or
operational.

To display a Navaid Radial menu, on the main section of the map, tap on the Navaid
icon.

Figure 122 Navaid Radial Menu

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 215
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.2.2.4 Airport Radial Menu


The Airport Radial menu allows the instructor to place a spider web around the
airport.

15.2.2.5 Storm Radial Menu


The Storm Radial menu allows the instructor to:
• Activate a storm
• Delete an active storm
• Edit/change the storm parameters or properties
• Add a storm to the hook position
15.3 Right Tool Bar
The right tool bar controls the information displayed on the Main section of the map.
The right tool bar includes the following features.

Figure 123 Right Tool Bar

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 216
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.3.1 Zoom +/-


Tap the + or - buttons to zoom in and out on the map.

15.3.2 Auto Range


Tap this button to ensure the aircraft and reference runway are always both visible on
the map.

15.3.3 Scales
Tap this button to display the available map scales ranging from 5nm to 350nm.
Scales allows the user to change the map range in nautical miles. The range
represents the range across the x-axis of the display in nautical miles.

Figure 124 Scales

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 217
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.3.4 Perspective
Tap this button to set the map in 3D mode.

Perspective also offers:


• Various aircraft perspectives, and
• Two dials with a cursor to change the aircraft perspective

Figure 125 Perspective

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 218
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.3.5 Map to
Tap the Map to button to center the map to the selected element (airport, aircraft and
storm).

Figure 126 Map to

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 219
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.3.6 Symbols
Symbols allows instructor to declutter the map by choosing to hide certain symbols
from the scene. The Symbols panel features a list of all airports, navaids, storms and
players each associated with T and eye visibility icons.

Tap the T visibility icon next to an item to display or hide the text associated to this
item.

Tap the eye visibility icon next to an item to display or hide this item from the map.

Symbols can include:


• Airports
• Navaids
• Storms
• Players – Intruders

Figure 127 Symbols

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 220
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.3.7 Indicators
Indicators allows instructor to declutter the map by choosing to hide certain indicators
and tools from the scene. The Indicators panel features a list of all indicators and tools
along with an eye visibility icon.

Tap the eye visibility icon next to an item to display or hide this item from the map.

Indicators and tools can include:


• Spider web
• FMS route
• Timeline
• Track
• Compass
• Scale
• Wind barb

Figure 128 Indicators


Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 221
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.4 Map Footer


The Map footer includes controls that are grouped in three sections:
• Left Side Footer
• Middle Footer
• Right Footer

15.4.1 Left Side Footer


The left side footer provides supplemental information about the student’s
performance such as graphs. It includes the following toggle and roll up menus:
• Events
• Plots
• Clear

Figure 129 Left Side Footer

15.4.1.1 Events
The Events toggle menu displays/hides the exceedances and abnormal conditions
messages identified by the system.

Figure 130 Left Events Toggle Menu

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 222
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.4.1.2 Plots
The Plots roll up menu displays the following plots:
• Precision Approach
• Non-Precision Approach
• Takeoff
• Tail Clearance
• Runway

Each of the above approach and takeoff, upon selection shows their associated graphs
on the map.

Figure 131 Left Plots Toggle Menu

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 223
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.4.1.2.1 Precision Approach


The Precision Approach graphs allow the instructor to evaluate and assess the
performance of the flight crew by monitoring the actual position of the aircraft on
three Precision Approach graphs:
• Glide Path Deviation
• Localizer Deviation
• Speed Deviation

Figure 132 Precision Approach Graphs (Typical)

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 224
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.4.1.2.2 Non-Precision Approach


The Non-Precision Approach graphs allow the instructor to evaluate and assess the
performance of the flight crew by monitoring the actual position of the aircraft on
three Non-Precision Approach graphs:
• Height Above Terrain (HAT) vs Distance to Touchdown
• Center Line Deviation
• Speed Deviation

Figure 133 Non-Precision Approach Graphs (Typical)

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 225
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.4.1.2.3 Takeoff
The Takeoff graphs allow the instructor to evaluate and assess the performance of the
flight crew by monitoring the actual position of the aircraft on three Takeoff graphs:
• Height Above Terrain (HAT) vs Distance to Takeoff
• Center Line Deviation
• Speed Deviation

Figure 134 Takeoff Graphs (Typical)

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 226
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.4.1.2.4 Tail Clearance


The Tail Clearance graphs allow the instructor to evaluate and assess the tail
clearance to avoid a tail strike by monitoring five graphs:
• Airspeed
• Radar Altitude
• Tail Clearance (inches)
• Pitch Attitude
• Pitch Rate

Figure 135 Tail Clearance Graphs (Typical)

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 227
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.4.1.2.5 Runway
The Runway graph allows the instructor to evaluate and assess the performance of the
flight crew by monitoring the actual position of the aircraft on the runway.

Figure 136 Runway Graph (Typical)

15.4.1.2.6 Clear Plots


Tap the Clear Plots button clears the plots on display.

15.4.1.2.7 Range (nm)


The Range (nm) slider allows the adjust the scale of the graphs.

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 228
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.4.1.3 Clear
The Clear roll up menu clears items on the virtual environment. Elements that can be
cleared include:
• Timeline
• Storm
• Event list
• Track

Figure 137 Left Clear Toggle Menu

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 229
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.4.2 Middle Footer


The Middle footer allows the user to add event markers, add and edit storms to the
simulation, record a training session as well as print the current page or additional
pages. It includes the following buttons:
• Marker
• Storm
• Recording
• Print

Figure 138 Middle Footer

15.4.2.1 Marker
Tap the Marker button to display the Marker roll up menu. This roll up menu features
various types of colored markers that can be used to mark an event on the flight path
of the aircraft and in the training session video recording (for IOS equipped with a
Brief/Debrief System).

These markers are intended to help the instructor find specific segments of the
training session.

Figure 139 Marker Roll up Menu

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 230
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.4.2.2 Storm
Tap the Storm button to display the STORM PROPERTIES sliding panel.

15.4.2.3 STORM PROPERTIES Sliding Panel


The STORM PROPERTIES Sliding Panel allows the instructor to:
• Add several types of storms on the map environment
• Rotate the selected storm
• Add various effects to the selected storm

This sliding panel includes the following sections:


• List of storms
• TYPE
• ROTATION & EFFECTS

Figure 140 STORM PROPERTIES Sliding Panel

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 231
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.4.2.3.1 Adding a Storm


Adding a storm can be done in either one of two ways, through the:
• Cursor Radial menu
Or,
• Storm button on the map middle footer

To add a storm from the Cursor Radial menu:


1) Tap on the desired location on the map.
2) From the Cursor Radial menu, tap on the Add Storm icon (see Figure 120).
This displays the STORM PROPERTIES sliding panel.
3) From the TYPE section, tap to select the desired storm. This places the selected
storm at the cursor location on the map.
4) Edit the storm properties.
5) Tap on the Activate button to activate the storm at the cursor location.
6) A red ACTIVE flag next to the selected storm indicates that the storm is active
in the simulation.
7) A red badge overlaid onto the map middle footer Storm button indicates the
activated storms.

To add a storm from the Storm button:


1) Tap the Storm button on the map middle footer. This displays the STORM
PROPERTIES sliding panel.
2) From the TYPE section, tap to select the desired storm. This places the selected
storm approximately 20 nautical miles in front of the aircraft.
3) Edit the storm properties.
4) Tap on the Activate button to activate the storm.
5) A red ACTIVE flag next to the selected storm indicates that the storm is active
in the simulation.
6) A red badge overlaid onto the map middle footer Storm button indicates the
activated storms.

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 232
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.4.2.3.2 List of Storms


This section includes a list of storms active or not in the simulation. An active storm
is indicated by a red ACTIVE flag.

Once selected, the user can then modify the storm properties.

15.4.2.3.3 TYPE Section


This section displays all available storms that can be inserted into the simulation.
When a storm is selected, it is highlighted in light blue and shown in light gray on the
map environment but it is not activated in the simulation just yet.

Figure 141 STORM PROPERTIES –Storm Selected

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 233
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.4.2.3.4 ROTATION EFFECTS Section


This section is displayed as soon as a storm type is selected. Once a storm is selected,
this section offers the controls necessary to edit the storm.

Figure 142 STORM PROPERTIES –ROTATION & EFFECTS

15.4.2.3.5 Storm Rotation Graph


The Storm Rotation Graph is an interactive graph that features a light blue cursor that
allows the instructor to rotate the storm between 0-360 degrees. Touch and hold the
cursor and move it around the dial to rotate storm.

15.4.2.3.6 Reposition to Cursor


Tap this button to reposition the center of the selected storm to the cursor location on
the map.

15.4.2.3.7 Move with wind


Tap this checkbox to move the selected storm in accordance with the wind
environment parameters.

15.4.2.3.8 Storm Effects


Tap this checkbox to activate lightning on the visual scene. This effect is shown
within the physical boundaries of the storm.

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 234
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Map Workspace

15.4.2.3.9 Activate
Tap this button to activate the selected storm. When active, the selected storm shown
in light gray on the map changes to color.

15.4.2.3.10 Delete
Tap this button to remove the selected storm from the map.

15.4.2.4 Recording
The Recording button is a toggle Start/Stop type button that controls the video
recording of a training session. This button is only available on IOS equipped with a
Brief/Debrief System.

During a training session video recording, event markers available from the Map
footer can be added to identify special events in the session and ultimately facilitate
the review of the recorded training session.

Such video recording can be used to evaluate Crew Resource Management (CRM)
during the training session.

The Recording button has the following status:

Ready to record / Press to start recording

Recording / Press to stop recording

15.4.2.5 Print
The Print button functions just like the Print button on the Control Board footer.
Refer to paragraph 11.9.

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 235
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

15.4.3 Right Side Footer


The right-side footer includes the following buttons:

Figure 143 Right Side Footer

15.4.3.1 Latch
The Latch button allows the instructor to:
• Latch the map to the ownship
o The ownship will remain centered in the map.

15.4.3.2 2D/3D
The 2D/3D toggle button switches the display mode on the main section between 2D
to 3D and vice versa.

15.4.3.3 Help
The Help button functions just like the Help button on the Control Board footer.
Refer to paragraph 11.13.

15.4.3.4 Workspace
The Workspace button functions just like the Workspace button on the Control Board
footer. Refer to paragraph 11.14.

Map Workspace
21 Mar 2019
Page 236
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16. Advanced
The Advanced toolbar features quick access buttons allowing the instructor to:
• Modify Aircraft, Position and Environment parameters.
• Perform various types of freeze and resets.
• Trigger failures.
• Access additional pages not accessible from the Control Board pages such as:
o Intruders
o Comms - ATIS
o Comms – ATC
o Upset Recovery Scenarios and Events (UPRT)
o Recording - FSC/Recall

Tapping each of these button, displays a set of sub buttons providing access to
associated pages.

Figure 144 Advanced Tool Bar

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 237
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.1 Aircraft
The Aircraft button allows the instructor to alter Weight & Balance parameters,
interact with various aircraft doors and carry out certain ground service tasks.

The Aircraft sub-pages accessible from Advanced offer the same controls as the
Weight & Balance and Services & Doors sliding panels accessible from the Control
Board and described in paragraphs 8.10 and 8.11.

Figure 145 Advanced - Aircraft

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 238
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.2 Position
The Position button allows the instructor to change reference airport/runway,
reposition and slew the aircraft.

The Position sub-pages accessible from Advanced offer the same controls as the
Airport & Reposition and Slew sliding panels accessible from the Control Board and
described in paragraphs 7.3 and 9.2.

Figure 146 Advanced - Position

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 239
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.3 Environment
Environment includes several sub-buttons to alter various environmental parameters
for a specific airport or En Route region.

In Environment, the instructor can:


• Alter the weather and time of day of a region
• Introduce microbursts and windshears
• Apply ice conditions on the aircraft
• Change the runway lighting
• Introduce visual effects at the airport

Figure 147 Advanced - Environment

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 240
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.3.1 WEATHER REGION


WEATHER REGION provides all necessary controls to alter environmental
conditions for up to five different airports and en route weather conditions.

For a specific region, the instructor can alter the current region parameters listed
below:
• Winds, temperature and pressure
• Clouds and visibility conditions
• Precipitation
• Runway conditions
• Turbulence

WEATHER REGION offers the possibility of:


• Saving the current region weather parameters into a Scenario
• Recalling previously saved region weather scenarios
• Adding a Region
• Deleting Scenarios

Figure 148 Advanced – Weather Region (Typical)

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 241
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.3.1.1 Multiple Weather Airport Conditions


There are two different modes that determine when multiple weather airport
conditions will be copied to the ambient weather conditions.

16.3.1.1.1 First Mode


The first mode uses distance to airport. The specific airport conditions are copied into
ambient weather conditions when the aircraft is within 50 NM from that airport.

If en route conditions are defined, then they will be copied into ambient weather
conditions when the aircraft is flying outside the 50 NM radius of any of the 5 defined
airports.

Therefore, if any airport for which no weather conditions are defined, becomes the
reference airport, the en route weather conditions will apply to the ambient weather
conditions at that airport.

16.3.1.1.2 Second Mode


The second mode uses the reference airport that is specified in the AIRPORT &
REPOSITION Sliding Panel.

When the reference airport matches a multiple weather airport, the specific airport
conditions are copied into ambient weather conditions.

If en route conditions are defined, then they will be copied into ambient weather
conditions when the reference airport on the reposition page does not match a
multiple weather airport.

16.3.1.2 Adding a Region


Tap on the WEATHER REGION page and follow the onscreen instructions to add a
region.

Figure 149 Advanced – Adding a Region

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 242
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.3.1.3 Saving/Recalling Weather Scenario


WEATHER REGION allows the instructor to save the current weather conditions for
a specific region as well as recall an existing pre-defined/pre-saved weather scenario.

The Save Scenario functionality only saves weather parameters, it does not save nor
include an active storm, microburst, predictive windshear, non-predictive windshear
or icing conditions. Similarly, the Recall Scenario functionality only recalls weather
parameters from a specific scenario.

In either case, the status of an active storm, microburst, predictive windshear,


non-predictive windshear or icing conditions remains unaffected by the Save/Recall
Scenario functionality.

During a Save Scenario, the following weather parameters are saved:


• Sea level temperature
• Intermediate and tropopause temperatures
• Altimeter setting (QNH)
• Surface, intermediate and tropopause winds

When a saved weather scenario is recalled from a different location with different
terrain elevation, the surface temperature and pressure (QFE) are recomputed from
the retained data to maintain the same profile from sea level to intermediate altitude.

The same surface wind and intermediate wind still apply at the new location as
defined at the location where the weather was saved.

16.3.1.3.1 Save Scenario


Tap this button to display the SAVE SCENARIO popup.
Then, enter the name of the airport/En Route weather scenario and then tap on Save
or Cancel (as applicable).

Figure 150 Weather Region – Save Scenario

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 243
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.3.1.3.2 Recall Scenario


Tap this button to display the RECALL SCENARIO popup.

16.3.1.3.3 Recall Scenario Popup


This popup lists all the saved scenarios either by date or alphabetically. It allows the
instructor to save (under a new name), load or delete a selected weather scenario.

Figure 151 Weather Region – Recall Scenario

16.3.2 Windshear & Microburst


Tapping on the Windshear & Microburst button opens the WINDSHEAR &
MICROBURST sliding panel. The Windshear and microburst functionality is
identical to that found and described in the REFERENCE AIRPORT Tab (see
paragraph 9.13).

16.3.3 Icing
Tapping on the Icing button opens the ICING sliding panel. The icing functionality is
identical to that found and described in the CURRENT CONDITIONS Tab (see
paragraph 7.4).

16.3.4 Time of Day


Tapping on the Time of Day button opens the TIME OF DAY page allowing for
general time of day change (Dawn, Day, Dusk Night change). The Time of Day
functionality is identical to that found and described in the REFERENCE AIRPORT
Tab (see paragraph 9.4).

16.3.5 Lighting
Tapping on the Lighting button opens the LIGHTING page. This page contains the
same lighting controls as those found in the AIRPORT REPOSITION Tab –
Advanced lighting plus the following three additional buttons.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 244
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.3.5.1 Stop Bar


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to illuminate the Stop Bar lights.
From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to extinguish the Stop Bar lights.

16.3.5.2 Taxi
Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the taxi lights intensity.
(Min = 0, Max = 5).

16.3.5.3 City
Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the city lights intensity.
(Min = 0, Max = 5).

16.3.6 Airport Visual FX Page


The AIRPORT VISUAL FX Page allows the instructor to:
• Modify runway conditions and lighting
• Modify airport lights
• Add pre-recorded traffic effects to the visual scene

This page includes four tabs:


• RUNWAY CONDITIONS
• VISUAL CONTROL
• AIRPORT LIGHTS
• RUNWAY DEFAULT LIGHTING

Figure 152 AIRPORT VISUAL FX

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 245
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.3.6.1 RUNWAY CONDITIONS Tab


This tab includes read-only text fields that display the current runway conditions and
a Runway Conditions expandable button that upon tapping opens the RUNWAY
CONDITIONS sliding panel.

16.3.6.2 VISUAL CONTROL Tab


This tab includes the following buttons.

16.3.6.2.1 Marshaller
When the aircraft is within an appropriate position to the gate, the marshaller signals
in the aircraft to the gate.

From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to display the marshaller into the visual
scene.

From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to remove the marshaller into the
visual scene.

This Marshaller button is disabled depending on certain conditions, for example:


• When the aircraft is off the ground
• During an aircraft pushback

16.3.6.2.2 Recorded Traffic


Tap this expandable button to display the RECORDED TRAFFIC sliding panel
which allows the instructor to add recorded traffic scenario effects to the visual scene.

16.3.6.2.3 Scenario Traffic


Tap this expandable button to display the SCENARIO TRAFFIC sliding panel which
allows the instructor to add recorded traffic scenario effects to the visual scene.

16.3.6.3 AIRPORT LIGHTS Tab


This tab includes buttons to control airport lights.

16.3.6.3.1 Stop Bar


From the Normal state, tap this toggle button to illuminate the Stop Bar lights.
From the Activated state, tap this toggle button to extinguish the Stop Bar lights.

16.3.6.3.2 Taxi
Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the taxi lights intensity.
(Min = 0, Max = 5).

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 246
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.3.6.3.3 City
Tap this dropdown button to expand selection, then select the city lights intensity.
(Min = 0, Max = 5).

16.3.6.4 RUNWAY DEFAULT LIGHTING Tab


This tab includes buttons to control the default lighting at the selected reference
airport runway.

16.3.6.4.1 Runway Lighting


Tap this expandable button to display the RUNWAY LIGHTING sliding panel.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 247
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4 Intruders
The Intruders button displays an INTRUDERS page allowing the instructor to setup
traffic scenarios by inserting intruders around the aircraft airspace.

Figure 153 Advanced - Intruders

16.4.1 INTRUDERS Page


The INTRUDERS page allows the instructor to setup traffic scenarios by inserting
intruders around the ownship’s (aircraft) airspace. This page includes the following
subpages:
• TCAS
• Random Traffic
• Approach Traffic
• ITP

Through this page the instructor can train the flight crew in responding to several
types of in-flight traffic scenarios.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 248
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.4.1.1 TCAS
The TCAS page includes the necessary controls to customize the presence of an
intruder into the training session. It includes the following sections:
• INTRUDER POSITION
• INTRUDER VERTICAL PATH
• SCENARIO
• INTRUDER TRANSPONDER EQUIPMENT
• OWNSHIP CAPACITY LIMITATION

Figure 154 TCAS Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 249
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4.1.1.1 INTRUDER POSITION Section


This section includes mutually exclusive radio buttons allowing the instructor to set
the relative direction of the approaching intruder aircraft in relation to the ownship.

Settings can either be:


• Ahead Left Bearing = -45 degree
• Ahead Bearing = 0 degree
• Ahead Right Bearing = +45 degree
• Abeam Left Bearing = -90 degree
• Abeam Right Bearing = +90 degree
• Behind Left Bearing = -135 degree
• Behind Bearing = 180 degree
• Behind Right Bearing = +135 degree

16.4.1.1.2 INTRUDER VERTICAL FLIGHT PATH Section


This section includes mutually exclusive radio buttons allowing the instructor to set
the vertical flight path of the intruder aircraft in relation to the ownship.

Settings can either be:


Descending Tap to position the intruder aircraft above the ownship which then
starts to descend towards the ownship.

Level Tap to position the intruder aircraft at the same level as the
ownship aircraft which then starts to move towards the ownship.

Climbing Tap to position the intruder aircraft below the ownship which then
starts to climb towards the ownship.

16.4.1.1.3 SCENARIO Section


This section includes radio buttons that allow the instructor to select either one of
these scenarios:
• Traffic Advisory Only (Single Threat)
• Resolution Advisory (Dual Threat) No climb/No descend
• Resolution Advisory (Single Threat) Climb/Descend
• Resolution Advisory (Single Threat) Climb/Descend then Increase
Climb/Descent

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 250
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

• Resolution Advisory (Dual Threat) Climb/Descent then Level Off


• Reversal Resolution Advisory (Single Threat) Perform Above FL210

WARNING:

OWN A/C must be in stable flight for TCAS scenario training.


The DESCEND DESCEND vertical guidance is inhibited:
• under 1000 ft AGL when descending
• under 1200 ft AGL when climbing

16.4.1.1.3.1 Traffic Advisory Only (Single Threat)


Scenario specifics:
• TCAS will only generate a Traffic Advisory (TA).
• Number of intruders specified in this scenario is 1.
• Own aircraft V/S recommended max limit +/-1000 fpm.

In this scenario, the intruder approaches from the direction selected in the Horizontal
Position pane and will follow that same trajectory until the time of collision is
approximately 100 sec before the closest point of approach.

Then, the vertical path of the intruder is computed to achieve a relative altitude that
will have the intruder pass inside the TA altitude limit but outside the RA altitude
limit.

This maneuver will be completed 10 seconds before entering into the RA range
envelope.

16.4.1.1.3.2 Resolution Advisory (Dual Threat) No climb/No descend


Scenario specifics:
• TCAS will generate an RA requiring no specific action by the crew.
• Number of intruders specified in this scenario is 2.
• Own aircraft V/S recommended max limit +/-200 fpm.

In this scenario, one of the two intruders will approach from the direction selected on
the Horizontal Position pane while the other intruder will be positioned at a relative
bearing that can vary from 15 to 45 degrees from the bearing of the first intruder.

The intruders remain at the same altitude until the time of collision is approximately
100 seconds before closest point of approach. The vertical path of intruders remains
symmetric with respect to own aircraft.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 251
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

The first maneuver of intruders is computed to allow them to always respect a relative
altitude of 100 to 150 feet inside the RA altitude envelope. As soon as one of the two
intruders meets both TA conditions (i.e. altitude and range), the audio message
“TRAFFIC TRAFFIC” is heard.

The intruders should stabilize at an altitude inside the RA altitude envelope and
maintain a level flight until the end of the scenario. During this scenario, TCAS will
give preventive advisory like “MONITOR VERTICAL SPEED” when the first
intruder satisfies both RA conditions (i.e. altitude and range). No corrective advisory
should be heard until the “CLEAR OF CONFLICT” message is issued and no crew
action is required for this scenario.

16.4.1.1.3.3 Resolution Advisory (Single Threat) Climb/Descend


Scenario specifics:
• TCAS generates an RA requiring the crew to climb or descend to avoid conflict.
• Number of intruders specified in this scenario is 1.
• Own aircraft V/S recommended max limit +/-1000 fpm.

In this scenario, the intruder starts from the direction selected on the Horizontal
Position pane and remains at the same altitude until the time of collision is
approximately 100 sec before the closest point of approach.

The first maneuver of the intruder is computed to allow the intruder to reach a relative
altitude within the RA altitude envelope (which is approximately 100 ft inside the
envelope) and 10 seconds before the intruder enters into the RA range envelope.
During this maneuver, the audio message “TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC” should be heard
initially when the intruder satisfies both TA conditions (i.e. altitude and range).

In the next 15 seconds, the vertical path of the intruder is computed to target an
altitude of 100 feet above (or below) the own aircraft altitude at the closest point of
approach.

During this phase, a corrective advisory message should be issued to avoid the
intruder. The crew must follow the corrective advisory rapidly and smoothly without
overshooting the target. The intruder will continue his descent (or climb) at a rate
between 1500 and 2000 feet/minute until 5 seconds after the closest point of approach
and stabilize at this altitude. No other corrective advisory message will be announced
until the “CLEAR OF CONFLICT” message.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 252
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.4.1.1.3.4 Resolution Advisory (Single Threat) Climb/Descend then


Increase Climb/Descent
Scenario specifics:
• TCAS generates an RA requiring the crew to climb or descend to avoid conflict.
• Number of intruders specified in this scenario is 1.
• Own aircraft V/S recommended max limit +/-1000 fpm.

In this scenario, the crew is required to increase climb/descend to clear the conflict,
due to the maneuver by the threat.

The intruder starts from the direction selected on the Horizontal Position pane and
remains at the same altitude until the time of collision is approximately 100 sec
before the closest point of approach.

The first maneuver of the intruder is computed to allow the intruder to reach a relative
altitude within the RA altitude envelope (which is approximately 100 ft inside the
envelope) and 10 seconds before the intruder enters into the RA range envelope.
During this maneuver, the audio message “TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC” should be heard
initially when the intruder satisfies both TA conditions (i.e. altitude and range).

During the next 15 seconds, the intruder vertical path is computed to target an altitude
100 feet above (or below) the own aircraft altitude at the closest point of approach.

During this next phase, a corrective advisory message should be issued to avoid the
intruder. The crew must follow the corrective advisory rapidly and smoothly without
overshooting the target. The intruder will continue his descent (or climb) at a rate
between 2000 and 2500 feet/minute until 5 seconds after the closest point of approach
and stabilize at this altitude.

A second corrective advisory message should be issued to avoid the intruder. The
crew must follow the new corrective advisory rapidly and smoothly without
overshooting the target. No other corrective advisory message will be announced until
the “CLEAR OF CONFLICT” message.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 253
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4.1.1.3.5 Resolution Advisory (Dual Threat) Climb/Descent then Level


Off
Scenario specifics:
• TCAS generates an RA requiring the crew to climb or descend to avoid conflict.
• Number of intruders specified in this scenario is 2.
• Own aircraft V/S recommended max limit +/-1000 fpm.

During the maneuver, the crew is required to do a second maneuver to clear the
conflict, due to the maneuver by the second threat.

Two intruders will be asymmetrically positioned (in horizontal and vertical planes)
with respect to own aircraft. Only one of the two intruders will start from the
direction selected on the Horizontal Position pane while the other intruder will be
positioned at a relative bearing which varies from 15 to 45 degrees from the bearing
of the first intruder.

Each intruder remains at the same altitude until the time of collision is approximately
100 seconds before the closest point of approach. One of the intruders will pass above
and the other intruder will pass below the own aircraft during the scenario.

The maneuver of the first intruder is computed to allow the intruder to reach a relative
altitude inside the RA altitude envelope (about 100-150 feet inside) and 10 seconds
before the intruder enters into the RA range envelope. During this maneuver the audio
message “TRAFFIC TRAFFIC” should be heard when the intruder meets both TA
conditions (altitude and range).

During the next 15 seconds, the intruder vertical path is computed to target an altitude
100 feet above (or below) the own aircraft altitude at the closest point of approach.
During this next phase, a corrective advisory message should be issued to avoid this
intruder and will command the crew to fly the aircraft in the direction of the second
intruder.

The crew must follow the corrective advisory rapidly and smoothly without
overshooting the target. The first intruder stabilizes at this altitude and the second
intruder, who was not previously a resolution advisory, becomes a resolution
advisory.

A second corrective advisory message, “LEVEL OFF, LEVEL OFF”, should be


issued to avoid the second intruder. The crew must follow the corrective advisory
rapidly and smoothly without overshooting the target. No other corrective advisory
message will be announced until the “Clear of conflict”.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 254
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.4.1.1.3.6 Reversal Resolution Advisory (Single Threat) Perform Above


FL210
Scenario Specifics:
• TCAS generates an RA requiring the crew to climb or descent to avoid conflict.
• Number of intruders specified in this scenario is 1.
• Own aircraft V/S recommended max limit +/-1000 fpm.

In this scenario, the crew is required to perform a reversal climb/descent maneuver


following the initial RA/maneuver in order to clear the conflict due to a maneuver
done by the intruder.

The scenario starts with the intruder approaching from the location selected in the
Horizontal Position pane and at the same level as the own aircraft.

The path of the intruder is continuously re-computed to mirror that of the own aircraft
until the first resolution advisory is issued by the own aircraft.

As the TCAS detects that the intruder does not dis-engage (in other words, it is still
approaching the own a/c at the same level), the own a/c will issue a second RA (this
is the reversal RA).

As the own a/c tries to maneuver to avoid conflict after the reversal RA, the intruder
dis-engages (i.e, stops mirroring the actions of the own a/c) and follows its own
trajectory at that point.

For example at FL150, during the scenario:

• TCAS will issue a TA advisory "TRAFFIC TRAFFIC" approximately at 45


sec, at which time the intruder meets the TA range test and TA altitude test.

• Subsequently, TCAS will issue a RA advisory "CLIMB CLIMB" or


"DESCEND DESCEND" at approximately 30 sec, at which time it meets the
RA range test ant RA altitude test.

• TCAS will issue a RA reverse advisory such as “DESCEND, DESCEND


NOW" or "CLIMB, CLIMB NOW" at approximately 20 sec before the CPA.
The success of this scenario requires that the flight crew’s response to resolution
advisory is rapid and smooth.

Note: It should be noted that while the acceleration response to the initial RA is
approximately 0.25g, the acceleration response to the reversal RA is
approximately 0.35g.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 255
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4.1.1.4 INTRUDER TRANSPONDER EQUIPMENT Section


This section includes checkboxes allowing the instructor to set the interrogation mode
of the intruder transponder(s).

16.4.1.1.4.1 Altitude Reporting


The Altitude Reporting check box has two statuses:
Checked This sets the transponder mode of intruders in Mode C/S which
causes the transponder of intruders to transmit their altitude. In this
mode, TCAS will issue Traffic Advisory and Resolution Advisory
if any.

Unchecked This sets the transponder mode of intruders in Mode A which


causes the transponder of intruders to not transmit their altitude.
On the TCAS display, the intruder symbol will be shown without
any altitude tag. Therefore, no Resolution Advisory is issued by
TCAS.

16.4.1.1.4.2 ADS-B Reporting


The ADS-B Reporting check box has two statuses:
Checked This allows the transponder of intruders to transmit their ADS-B
information such as position, speed and direction of flight (latitude,
longitude, vertical speed etc). When ADS-B is checked, ADS-B is
being reported.

Unchecked This does not allow the transponder of intruders to transmit their
ADS-B information. When ADS-B is unchecked, ADS-B is not
being reported.

16.4.1.1.5 OWNSHIP CAPACITY LIMITATION


This section includes a checkbox allowing or inhibiting bearing measurement from
the TCAS antennas.

16.4.1.1.5.1 No Bearing Data Measured


The No Bearing Data Measured check box has two statuses:
Checked This inhibits the bearing measurement from the TCAS antennas.

Unchecked This allows the bearing measurement from the TCAS antennas.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 256
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.4.1.1.6 Start Scenario


Tap to activate the intruder scenario.

16.4.1.1.7 Stop Scenario


Tap to stop the intruder scenario.

16.4.1.2 Random Traffic


The Random Traffic page includes the necessary controls to:
• Insert any number of intruders
• Select the Altitude Separation Model
• Select the transponder settings of intruders and ownship capacity limitation

Figure 155 Random Traffic Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 257
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4.1.2.1 NUMBER OF INTRUDERS Section


This section includes the controls to set the number of intruders by:
• Moving the slider to the desired number
• Touching the input text field and entering the number of intruders using the
keypad

16.4.1.2.2 ALTITUDE SEPARATION MODEL Section


This section includes radio buttons allowing the instructor to select either one of these
models:
• RVSM – enRoute Vertical Separation Minima
• IFR – Instrument Flight Rules
• VRR – Visual Flight Rules

The selected number of intruders will be placed on the selected model.

16.4.1.2.3 INTRUDER TRANSPONDER SETTINGS Section


This section includes the controls allowing the instructor to set the type of Altitude
Reporting and ADS-B Reporting of the intruder’s transponder.

Altitude Reporting Refer to paragraph 16.4.1.1.4.1 for details.

No ADS-B Reporting This setting does not allow the transponder of intruders to
transmit their ADS-B information. When No ADS-B
Reporting is checked, ADS-B information is not being
reported.

ADS-B Reporting This setting allows the transponder of intruders to transmit


their ADS-B information such as position, speed and
direction of flight (latitude, longitude, vertical speed etc.).
When ADS-B Reporting is checked, ADS-B information
is being reported.

Mixed This setting sets a certain number of intruders with ADS-B


reporting and others with No ADS-B reporting.

16.4.1.2.4 OWNSHIP CAPACITY LIMITATION Section


This section includes a checkbox allowing or inhibiting bearing measurement from
the TCAS antennas. Refer to paragraph 16.4.1.1.5 for details.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 258
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.4.1.2.5 Clear Random Traffic


Tap this button to clear all random traffic.

16.4.1.3 Approach Traffic


The Approach Traffic page allows the instructor to:
• Insert 1 to 3 intruders
• Select the Altitude Separation Model
• Select the transponder settings of intruders and ownship capacity limitation

Through this page the instructor can introduce intruders in the training scenario in
order to evaluate and train the flight crew to respond to inflight traffic scenarios in the
approach phase of flight.

Figure 156 Approach Traffic Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 259
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4.1.3.1 NUMBER OF INTRUDERS Section


This section includes a dropdown button allowing the instructor to set the number of
intruders. Tap the button to expand selection, then tap to select the number of
intruders.

16.4.1.3.2 ALTITUDE SEPARATION MODEL Section


This section includes radio buttons allowing the instructor to select either one of these
models:
• Downwind
• Holding Pattern
• Crosswind
• Final
• Mixed

The selected number of intruders will be placed on the selected model.

16.4.1.3.3 INTRUDER TRANSPONDER SETTINGS


This section allows the instructor to set the type of Altitude Reporting and ADS-B
Reporting of the intruder’s transponder.

Altitude Reporting functions as described in paragraph 16.4.1.1.4.1.

Setting of the ADS-B Reporting parameter consists of selecting either one of the three
ADS-B radio buttons:

No ADS-B Reporting Displays status and selection does not allow the
transponder of intruders to transmit their ADS-B
information. When No ADS-B Reporting is checked,
ADS-B information is not being reported.

ADS-B Reporting Displays status and selection allows the transponder of


intruders to transmit their ADS-B information such as
position, speed and direction of flight (latitude, longitude,
vertical speed etc…). When ADS-B Reporting is checked,
ADS-B information is being reported.

Mixed Displays status and selection will set certain numbers of


intruders with ADS-B reporting and others with No ADS-
B reporting.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 260
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.4.1.3.4 OWNSHIP CAPACITY LIMITATION


This section includes a checkbox allowing or inhibiting bearing measurement from
the TCAS antennas. Refer to paragraph 16.4.1.1.5 for details.

16.4.1.3.5 Clear App. Traffic


Tap this button to clear all approach traffic.

16.4.1.4 In-Trail Procedure (ITP)


The ITP page allows the instructor to:
• View a list of predefined ITP scenarios
• Create, Edit and Delete ITP scenarios
• Activate ITP scenarios into the training scenario

This page includes the following tabs:


• PRE-DEFINED SCENARIOS
• QUICK SCENARIO

Through this page the instructor can activate various types of ITP scenarios with
multiple intruders positioned at various locations around the ownship’s airspace, in
order to evaluate and train the flight crew on how to respond to such situations.

Figure 157 ITP

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 261
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4.1.4.1 PRE-DEFINED SCENARIOS Tab


This tab includes the necessary controls to allow the instructor to:
• Manage a list of pre-defined ITP scenarios
• Create a new ITP scenario
• Edit and delete an ITP scenario

16.4.1.4.1.1 SCENARIOS Section


This section provides a listing of available ITP scenarios. Typically, CAE offers 12
scenarios. The name of each scenario is self-explanatory.

16.4.1.4.1.2 ITP ASSESSMENT Section


Given the selected ITP scenario, this section allows the instructor to evaluate whether
the ITP opportunity is possible (or not) at the Desired Flight Level (FL), prior to
activating the selected scenario into the training session.

The instructor selects an ITP scenario, enters the desired Flight Level and observes
the message in the ITP Assessment section to decide whether or not to activate the
scenario.

Figure 158 ITP Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 262
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.4.1.4.1.1 ITP Map


The Map provides a preview of the selected ITP scenario. It shows all intruders
included in the selected scenario in relation to the ownship (aircraft). For each
intruder, the map provides an aircraft symbol, Flight ID and relative altitude.

16.4.1.4.1.2 New Scenario


Tap the New Scenario button to display the NEW SCENARIO page.

16.4.1.4.1.3 Edit Scenario


Tap the Edit Scenario button to display the EDIT SCENARIO page.

16.4.1.4.1.4 Delete Scenario


Tap the Delete Scenario button to remove the selected scenario from the
SCENARIOS list. Prior to permanently deleting the selected scenario, a confirmation
popup is displayed.

Figure 159 Delete Scenario Popup

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 263
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4.1.4.1.5 NEW SCENARIO Page


This page includes the controls to allow an instructor to define the parameters of
several intruders for a given scenario. Tapping on an Intruder expandable button
displays the EDIT INTRUDER page of the selected intruder.

Figure 160 NEW SCENARIO Pages

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 264
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.4.1.4.1.6 EDIT INTRUDER Page


This page displays all the parameters that can be modified or set in order to define an
intruder in relation to the ownship.

Figure 161 EDIT INTRUDER Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 265
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4.1.4.1.7 EDIT SCENARIO page


This page includes the controls to allow an instructor to modify the parameters of
several intruders for a given scenario. Tapping on an Intruder expandable button
displays the EDIT INTRUDER page of the selected intruder.

Figure 162 EDIT SCENARIO Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 266
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.4.1.4.2 QUICK SCENARIO Tab


This tab includes the necessary controls to allow the instructor to quickly setup an
ITP scenario.

16.4.1.4.2.1 INTRUDERS Section


This section provides a listing of available intruders that can be customized.

16.4.1.4.2.2 ITP ASSESSMENT Section


Given the ITP scenario comprising several intruders, this section allows the instructor
to evaluate whether the ITP opportunity is possible (or not) at the Desired Flight
Level (FL), prior to activating this selected scenario into the training session.

The instructor customizes the parameters of each intruder, enters the desired Flight
Level and observes the message in the ITP Assessment section to decide whether or
not to activate the scenario.

16.4.1.4.2.3 ITP Map


The Map provides a preview of the ITP scenario being created. It shows all intruders
included in the scenario in relation to the ownship (aircraft). For each intruder, the
map provides an aircraft symbol, Flight ID and relative altitude.

Figure 163 QUICK SCENARIO Tab

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 267
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.4.1.5 Number of Intruders Indication

A red badge indicates the number of intruders.

16.4.1.6 Clear All Intruders


Tap this button to clear all intruders in the training scenario.
16.5 Comms
The Comms button provides access to the COMMUNICATIONS and DATALINK
pages allowing the instructor to change any audio monitor, instructor transmit, crew
transmit or calls controls as well as set various types of datalink parameters.

The Comms button also allows the instructor to modify and set:
• Automatic Terminal Information Service messages
• Air Traffic Controller messages

Figure 164 Advanced - Comms

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 268
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.5.1 ATIS
The ATIS page allows the instructor to monitor the current ATIS voice message that
is available at the Reference Airport and any of the Airport/En Route Environment
airports (or simply Environment Airports) which are defined.

The selected reference airport ICAO code appears just below the AIRPORT tab. A
green REF flag next to the ICAO airport code indicates that this is the reference
airport.

There two modes for the ATIS Messages: Automatic and Manual.

The default mode under normal conditions is Automatic. In this mode the ATIS
messages for the Reference Airport and the Environment Airports are automatically
updated to reflect the current weather on the Environment page and the Airport/En
Route Environment page. Whenever a weather change is entered by the instructor in
these pages, the ATIS message for that airport is immediately updated to reflect this
change.

In Automatic mode, the ATIS voice message cannot be overridden and therefore all
the weather input buttons on the ATIS page are disabled or grayed out. However, all
the text next to these disabled or grayed out buttons is displayed in white, since the
values reflect the actual ATIS message. The order of the buttons and weather readouts
matches the ATIS message format for the selected airport. The format type, FAA or
ICAO, is displayed in the sub-title.

There are two buttons on the ATIS page that are never disabled or grayed out:
Approach and Remarks. This is so because these are not associated with the weather
on the Environment page for the airports. The user can, at any time:
• Tap on either button
• Make another selection
• Tap on the Update Broadcast button
o The current ATIS message will be updated to reflect the selections.

The Manual mode allows the instructor to override the ATIS message at a airport.
The Manual mode is enabled by tapping on the Manual button. Doing so enables all
the weather input buttons on the ATIS page. At this point the instructor can then
make new selections and Update Broadcast to activate the new messages.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 269
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 165 ATIS Page

16.5.1.1 AIRPORT Tab


The AIRPORT Tab displays the selected airport ICAO code. A green REF flag
indicates the reference airport.

16.5.1.2 Manual
Display status and selection enables the ATIS message manual mode which allows
the instructor to modify some of the ATIS parameters. When the ATIS Manual mode
is selected, an amber MANUAL flag is displayed next to the selected airport.

In manual mode all the INFORMATION parameters are available for modification.

When manual mode is disabled all INFORMATION parameters are disabled or


grayed out.

16.5.1.3 Reset
Selecting Reset causes the modified parameters on the page to be updated to reflect
the current ATIS message.

16.5.1.4 Suspend ATIS Transmission


Displays status and selection disables ATIS transmission.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 270
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.5.1.5 Exclude Braking Action


Displays status and selection disables enunciation of the Braking action.

16.5.1.6 Met Report


Displays GMT report time and allows time modification for the ATIS message
without affecting simulator actual time.

16.5.1.7 Wind
Displays status and selection allows input of the ATIS message wind direction in
knots and wind speed in the selected unit (knots/min per sec). Wind Calm is
broadcast for zero wind speed.

16.5.1.8 Wind Gust


Displays the ATIS wind gust in meters per second, different from the actual simulator
value.

16.5.1.9 Visibility
Displays status and selection allows input of ATIS message visibility in the selected
unit (kilometers/statute miles), different from the actual simulator value. Units in the
broadcast ATIS message reflect the region from where the message originates.

16.5.1.10 RVR
Displays status and selection allows input of the ATIS message Runway Visual
Range (RVR) in the selected unit (meters/feet). Units in the broadcast ATIS message
reflect the region from where the message originates.

16.5.1.11 Weather Type


Displays current ATIS message special weather condition and selection displays the
Weather Type page.

16.5.1.12 Clouds
Displays current ATIS message cloud type and selection displays a list of cloud types.

16.5.1.13 Cloud Base


Displays status and selection allows input of cloud base in the selected unit
(metric/imperial) for ATIS message broadcast in the ATIS message.
(Min = 0, Max = 40000 ft)
(Min = 0, Max = 12192 m)

16.5.1.14 Temperature
Displays status and selection allows input of the ATIS message ground temperature in
the selected unit (Celsius/Fahrenheit). (Dynamic Min/Max)

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 271
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.5.1.15 Dew Point


Displays status and selection allows input of the ATIS message dew point
temperature in the selected unit (Celsius/Fahrenheit). The dew point maximum will
be the temperature and the dew point itself will be modified to the temperature if the
temperature is ever set less than the dew point. (Dynamic Min/Max)

16.5.1.16 QNH
Displays the ATIS environment pressure in the selected unit (hectopascals/inches Hg)
and allows input of barometric pressure different from the actual simulator sea level
barometric pressure. Units in the broadcast ATIS message reflect the region from
where the message originates.

16.5.1.17 Approach
Displays current ATIS message approach type and selection displays the Approach
type page allowing the instructor to change the Approach type message.

16.5.1.18 Arrival Runway


Displays current ATIS message arrival runway and selection displays a list of
additional runway selection.

16.5.1.19 Departure Runway


Displays current ATIS message departure runway and selection displays a list of
additional runway selection.

16.5.1.20 Runway Condition


Displays the runway conditions for the ATIS message and selection displays a list of
additional runway conditions.

16.5.1.21 Braking Action


Displays the braking action conditions for the ATIS message and selection displays a
list of additional braking actions conditions.

16.5.1.22 Remark
Displays the current reference airport ATIS remarks and selection displays a list of
additional remarks.

16.5.1.23 Update Broadcast


Displays status and selection updates the ATIS message to the latest environment
information which has been set by the instructor. The button is enabled while any of
the ATIS message parameters on the page are being changed. When selected, the
button remains active for 2 seconds.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 272
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.5.2 ATC
The Air Traffic Controller (ATC) page includes two main tabs: ATC UNIT and
MESSAGE.

The ATC UNIT tab includes a set of six pages to simulate ATC and background R/T
chatter messages. ATC messages are classified in six different categories depending
on the type of radio station provided:
• Clearance Delivery
• Ground Control
• Tower
• Departure
• Control
• Approach

Each of the above ATC Message pages contains generic messages for the specific
types of radio station.

Figure 166 ATC Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 273
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.5.2.1 Clearance Delivery


The Clearance Delivery page displays the types of clearance delivery messages that
can be customized and played.

16.5.2.1.1 ATC Clears


Displays the name of the air carrier and selection displays a dropdown menu allowing
for the selection of the name of various airline carriers to be spoken in the messages.

16.5.2.1.2 Flight Number


Displays the current air carrier flight number and selection displays a keyboard that
allows input of a new air carrier flight number.

16.5.2.1.3 Destination Airport


Displays status and selection displays a keyboard that allows input of the destination
airport name. This button is only available on the Clearance Delivery Message page.

16.5.2.1.4 Flight Level


Displays status and selection displays a keyboard that allows input of the Flight Level
for ATC clearance. (Min = 0, Max = Dynamic Max).

16.5.2.1.5 Play
The Play button plays the respective message.

16.5.2.1.6 Frequencies
Displays the active communication frequency for the selected type of ATC message
type.

16.5.2.1.7 Chatter
Displays status and selection activates/deactivates R/T chatter depending on the type
of ATC page where the function is selected. The chatter message is audible to the
crew provided that a receiver is tuned to the proper station at the required frequency
and is within range.

16.5.2.2 Ground Control


The Ground Control page displays the types of ground control messages that can be
customized and played.

16.5.2.2.1 Air Carrier Dropdown Menu


Displays the name of the air carrier and selection displays a dropdown menu allowing
for the selection of the name of various airline carriers to be spoken in the messages.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 274
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.5.2.2.2 Flight Number


Displays the current air carrier flight number and selection displays a keyboard that
allows input of a new air carrier flight number.

16.5.2.2.3 Taxi Route


Displays status and selection allows input of the taxi route for the ATC message
Contact.

16.5.2.2.4 Contact
Displays the current hand-off controller for the next designated radio contact and
selection displays a dropdown menu which provides controls for selecting the next
controller which will be given in the ATC messages.

16.5.2.2.5 Contact - Next Frequency


Displays status and selection allows input of the frequency for the next controller.
(Min = 118.0, Max = 136.97)

16.5.2.3 Tower
The Tower page displays the types of Tower messages that can be customized and
played.

16.5.2.4 Departure
The Departure page displays the types of Departure messages that can be customized
and played.

16.5.2.5 Control
The Control page displays the types of Control messages that can be customized and
played.

16.5.2.6 Approach
The Approach page displays the types of Approach messages that can be customized
and played.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 275
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.6 Failure
The Failure button provides access to pages that will allow the instructor to:
• Trigger malfunctions
• Trip/pop circuit breakers
• Trigger a radio station failure
• Obtain an overall status of:
o Armed and active malfunctions
o Popped/tripped circuit breakers
o Failed radio stations

The Malfunctions, Circuit Breakers and Fail Summary sub-pages accessible from
Advanced offer the same controls as the Malfunctions, Circuit Breakers and Fail
Summary sliding panels accessible from the Control Board and described in
paragraphs 8.12, 8.13 and 8.14.

Figure 167 Advanced – Failure

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 276
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.6.1 RADIO STATIONS Page


The RADIO STATION page provides the necessary controls to allow the instructor to
browse through the navigation database of ground radio stations available around the
selected area, in order to then:
• Fail/Reset navigation components of the selected ground radio station
• Reposition to the selected radio station
• Range/bearing from the aircraft to the selected radio station and the
IDENT/COMMS type of the station

This page shall provide a list of all radio stations in either one of three ways:
• By Station Name
• By IDENT
• BY Terminal Area (TMA)

Each listing provides:


• Station name and type
• IDENT of, in the case of a COMMS station the comms type
• Station frequency
• Runway number
• Status

16.6.1.1 Reset
Tap this button to reset the selected failed radio station.

16.6.1.2 Fail
Tap this button to fail the selected ratio station.

16.6.1.3 Cleared Failed Station


Tap this button to reset all radio stations failed by the instructor.

16.6.1.4 Reposition to Station


Tap this button to activate the reposition function to the selected station. This button
is disabled when a significant latitude/longitude change has occurred, until the visual
is ready.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 277
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

Figure 168 Advanced – RADIO STATION Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 278
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.7 UPRT
The Upset Prevention and Recovery Training (UPRT) button provides access to the
UPSET RECOVERY page which allows the instructor to trigger a Maneuver Based
Training (MBT) exercise or a Scenario Based Training (SBT) exercise.

Figure 169 Advanced – UPRT Button

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 279
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.7.1 UPSET RECOVERY Page


The UPSET RECOVERY Page provides all the necessary controls for the instructor
to:
• Trigger an upset condition scenario on the aircraft
• Monitor flight controls and flight data during the upset condition scenario
• Record the upset condition scenario
• Review the upset condition scenario recording
• Select a portion of the upset condition scenario recording during playback
• Execute a repositioning through the SLEW sliding panel and record

This page includes two main tabs:


• DATA SUMMARY
• CONTROLS

Figure 170 UPSET RECOVERY Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 280
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.7.1.1 DATA SUMMARY Tab


The DATA SUMMARY tab displays the running flight data as it evolves during the
UPRT scenario, it provides a summary of the most significant UPRT data parameters.

This tab consists of the following sections:


• Critical Parameters Listing
• Thumbnails
• Thumbnail View Pane
• Exceedance

Figure 171 DATA SUMMARY TAB

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 281
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.7.1.1.1 Critical Parameter Listing


This section displays information on the following five critical parameters:
• G Load
• AOA
• IAS
• Sideslip
• Pedal Force

For each critical parameter listed, three columns of data are provided:
• Current
• Minimum
• Maximum

During a scenario recording, the value in each column is continuously updated in


real-time.

In review mode, only the value in the Current column is updated to reflect the current
moment of time during playback. The value in the Minimum and Maximum columns
do not vary during playback, but represent the limits that were achieved during the
record mode.

Figure 172 Critical Parameters

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 282
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.7.1.1.2 Thumbnails
Thumbnails found in the DATA SUMMARY tab represent the main tools that will
aid the instructor evaluate the exercise performance. These thumbnails represent
pages that upon tapping will be viewed in the Thumbnail View Pane.

Thumbnails include:
• Alpha Beta Plot Page
• V-n Plot Page
• Primary Flight Display (PFD) page
• Synoptic Page
• Time History
• Quad View

Figure 173 Thumbnails and View Pane

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 283
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.7.1.1.3 Alpha Beta Plot Page


The Alpha-Beta Plot page plots the Angle Of Attack (AOA) on the Y-axis versus
sideslip on the X-axis.

As provided by the aerodynamic model supplier, there can be up to three envelopes


indicating the level of confidence in the simulator response with respect to the
aircraft.

Typically, the curves would be derived as follows:


• High Confidence: Flight Test Data
• Moderate Confidence: Wind Tunnel and/or Analytical Data
• Low Confidence: Model Extrapolation

Typically, two sets of envelopes are defined, one for flaps UP and another for flaps
OUT. The current flap setting is displayed at the top of the page.

The plot also includes four horizontal lines associated with the aircraft stall angle:
• Zero lift
• Stall warning
• Critical angle of attack (AOAc)
• Acute stall

The lines are colored green, green, amber and red respectively, indicating increasing
Advisory Levels of concern. These colored lines are used to define the advisory level
coloring rules for the points plotted on the Alpha-Beta and V-n Plot pages as well as
the value readouts for AOA.

16.7.1.1.4 V-n Plot Page


The V-n Plot page plots G load on the Y-axis versus Indicated Airspeed (IAS) on the
X-axis. In this graph, three colored envelopes indicate the increasing level of
concerns which are defined as: Green, Amber and Red.

16.7.1.1.5 Primary Flight Display (PFD)


The PFD page replicates a subset of the cockpit PFD that the instructor can view
when conducting a review of the UPRT exercise.

The PFD display is intended to be a generic PFD graphic used to indicate


approximately 15 PFD type parameters which have been deemed useful for UPRT
training. In no way is the intent to replicate the actual PFD of the aircraft being
simulated.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 284
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.7.1.1.6 Synoptic Page


The Synoptic page replicates the main cockpit controls that the instructor can view
when conducting a review of the UPRT exercise.

This page features:


• Status readouts at the top and bottom of the page
• Synoptic graphics for various controls
• Some of which include actual readouts

The synoptic graphic illustrations are only meant to be representative of the controls
for the aircraft being simulated to the extent that is required for UPRT training and
not actual repeats on these controls.

16.7.1.1.7 Quad View


The Quad View provides a simultaneous view of the Alpha Beta Plot, V-n Plot, PFD
and Synoptic pages.

Figure 174 Quad View

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 285
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.7.1.1.8 Time History


The Time History page is a tabular display in time of the most relevant parameters
relating to the selected UPRT scenario. The parameter set represents a collection of
the most significant parameters relevant when conducting a UPRT exercise.

This page can be used together with

During a recording, as the instructor is monitoring the plots pages and cockpit
repeaters in real-time, he/she can also monitor the Time History page as the recorded
tabular data appears.

Figure 175 Time History

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 286
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.7.1.1.9 Exceedance Section


This section lists advisory level messages that correspond to the exceedances that
occurred during the record phase.

The color messages correspond to the advisory level color rules as dictated and found
in the Alpha-Beta and V-n Plot pages and appear in order of severity.

These messages can then be used for debriefing the student according to the severity
order.

Figure 176 Exceedances

16.7.1.2 CONTROLS Tab


This tab includes the necessary controls to:
• Display the UPRT SCENARIOS page
o To select Maneuver Based Training (MBT) or Scenario Based Training
(SBT) exercises
• Record the selected upset condition scenario
• Determine the number of dots (data points) that will be plotted on the graphs
• Insert markers on the recording
• Play back the recording for in-cockpit debriefing

Figure 177 CONTROLS Tab

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 287
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.7.1.2.1 Select Scenario


Tap on this expandable button to display the UPRT SCENARIOS page.

16.7.1.2.2 Record/Reset
Tap the Record/Reset button to enter the recording mode. In this mode, the selected
upset scenario is being recorded.

Once the recording mode is initiated, it can be stopped manually by tapping on the
Stop button or automatically after the maximum record time expires, which is five
minutes or 300 seconds. The maximum length of a scenario is five minutes or 300
seconds.

During a scenario recording, the instructor can insert markers in the recording. Some
of the markers include:
• Start
• G Load
• Stall
• Nose High
• Nose Low
• Rolling G
• Other
• End
These are intended to facilitate in-cockpit debriefing with the flight crew.

Figure 178 Recording Markers

16.7.1.2.3 Time Range


Tap input text field to specify the maximum number of dots (data points) that will be
plotted on the graphs during the length of the recording.

Time Range basically allows the instructor to specify the maximum number of dots,
that will be displayed on the plot graphs based on elapsed time. This can served as a
mean to de-clutter the plots.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 288
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.7.1.2.4 Review Mode


Review mode allows the instructor to playback the entire scenario recording or a
portion of the scenario recording as defined by the Start and End markers added to the
recording timeline by the instructor.

During the recording phase, all 300 seconds of data are stored and are available for
playback in review mode. A Flight Freeze or Total Freeze pauses the record mode.

During recording, the instructor can prepare for the review mode by focusing on a
phase of the recording exercise. This is accomplished by inserting Start and End
markers at the moments in time for which the instructor wishes to review with the
flight crew.

Figure 179 Review Mode

16.7.1.2.5 Optional
The CONTROLS Tab can feature optional markers.

Figure 180 Optional Markers

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 289
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.7.2 UPRT SCENARIOS Page


This page provides all the necessary controls to allow the instructor to initiate a
Maneuver Based Training (MBT) or Scenario Based Training (SBT) exercise than
can last up to five minutes or 300 seconds.

Figure 181 UPRT SCENARIOS Page

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 290
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.7.2.1 MANEUVER BASED


This tab includes the maneuver based upset scenarios that can be triggered by the
instructor. These are grouped into the following section:
• WINGS LEVEL
• BANK
• ALTITUDE
Maneuver based scenarios act as just like a repositioning and when Flight Freeze is
ON, the aircraft is set into the selected maneuver based scenario until Flight Freeze is
released.

16.7.2.1.1 WINGS LEVEL


This section consists of scenario buttons that are mutually exclusive and upon tapping
will reposition the aircraft to either one of these scenarios:
• 40° Nose Up, Wing Level
• 25° Nose Down, Wing Level
• Level Flight
• L/D Max at Max Altitude

16.7.2.1.2 BANK
This section consists of scenario buttons that are mutually exclusive and upon tapping
will reposition the aircraft to either one of these scenarios:
• 30° Nose Up, 60° Bank
• 20° Nose Down, 65° Bank
• 20° Nose Down, 125° Bank
The mutually exclusive Left and Right radio buttons control the bank manoeuver to
the left or to the right.

16.7.2.1.3 ALTITUDE
This section consists of altitude radio buttons that are mutually exclusive and upon
tapping will set the MBT exercise to the selected altitude.
• Tapping the FL 100 button sets the MBT exercise altitude to FL100.
• Tapping the FL 200 button sets the MBT exercise altitude to FL200.
• Tapping the FL 350 button sets the MBT exercise altitude to FL350.

16.7.2.1.4 Execute
Tap this button to activate the selected MBT UPRT profile.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 291
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.7.2.2 SCENARIO BASED


This tab includes the scenario based upset scenarios that can be triggered by the
instructor. These consists of radio buttons that are mutually exclusive and are paired
as:
• Left Bank – Right Bank
• Airspeed Decrease – Airspeed Increase

These types of scenarios act as just like a gust of wind that will gradually set the
aircraft in the selected upset condition.

16.7.2.2.1 INTENSITY
This section allows the instructor to set the intensity of the selected scenario to either
Light, Moderate or Severe.

16.7.2.2.2 Activate
Tap this button to activate the selected Scenario Based scenario.
16.8 Resets/Freezes
The Reset/Freeze button displays RESET & FREEZES page that includes the same
Reset and Freeze selection as found on the Control Board workspace footer.

Figure 182 Advance - Resets/Freezes

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 292
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

16.9 Recording
The Recording button allows the instructor to capture various flight situations, and
later store them permanently and/or recall them.

Figure 183 Advance - Recording

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 293
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
A320 FFS Instructor Operating Station
Instructor User Guide

16.9.1 FSC/Recall
The Flight Situation Capture/Recall page allows the instructor to record up to 10
different flight situations of pre-defined parameters during training and restored them
later.

The recall functionality shall be performed in a manner similar to regular aircraft


repositions. For recalls to in-air situations, the recall is performed by trimming the
aircraft, as is normal for in air repositions. The simulator may not be recalled to
exactly the same state as at capture, but it will be in a similar condition.

For the flight controls, which are not backdriven, as defined in the IOS System
Requirements Specification, a Controls Not In Agreement (CNIA) page will appear to
indicate where the control should be positioned. When the freeze is removed, the pilot
will be able to continue the training session from the point at which the capture was
taken.

When Flight Freeze is removed, the pilot shall be able to continue the training
session.

Table 2 Parameters Recalled


Parameter Standard FSCR Recall
On-Ground In-Air

Cockpit Configuration
Landing Gear Lever CNIA: as per capture
Flap Lever CNIA: as per capture
Parking Brake lever CNIA: as per capture
Master fuel control switches CNIA: as per capture
Speed brake lever CNIA: Closed, Armed, Detent, Extended
Throttle levers For aircraft with motorized levers: For aircraft with motorized levers:
as per capture as per thrust trim position
No motorized levers use CNIA: No motorized levers use CNIA:
within two degrees of capture within two degrees of capture
Aircraft Configuration
A/C Gross weight As per capture
A/C Center of gravity As per capture
Total Fuel As per capture
Engine Flame Status As per capture
Speed brake surfaces As per capture
Doors position As per capture
Landing gear deflections Down position As per capture
Flaps surfaces As per lever position As per capture
Slat surfaces (where applicable) As per lever position As per capture
Stabilizer position As per capture Computed as per current
conditions
Flight Condition
Heading As per capture
A/C Longitude As per capture

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 294
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page
Instructor User Guide
Advanced

Parameter Standard FSCR Recall


On-Ground In-Air
A/C Latitude As per capture
Ground speed As per capture Computed as per current
conditions
Calibrated Airspeed Computed as per current conditions As per capture
Altitude ASL Computed as per current conditions As per capture
Rate of climb / descent Computed as per current conditions As per capture
Rate of change of body Computed as per current conditions As per capture
velocities
Pitch, Roll, Yaw Rates Computed as per current conditions As per capture
Accelerations Computed as per current conditions As per capture
Bank angle Computed as per current conditions Similar to value at capture (not
exact due to trimming)
Environment
Ambient Conditions As per capture
Airport/En Route Environment As per capture
Storms As per capture
Runway conditions As per capture
Reference Airport/Runway As per capture
Ground elevation As per capture
Miscellaneous
Ground power Not modified
Ground air Not modified
A/C on Jacks Not modified
A/C on Chocks Not modified
FMS Flight Plan As per capture within FMS/FMGEC limitations

16.9.1.1 Copy to Stored Captures


Displays the Flight Situation Transfer page, used to transfer a temporary capture into
permanent stored capture. The button is disabled or grayed out if a capture, recall,
reposition, or slew is active.

16.9.1.2 Clear All Captures


Selection displays the Clear All Captures popup menu requiring confirmation.

16.9.2 FMS Memory Save/Recall


Displays status and selection activates the process that saves/recalls the selected FMS
Memory flight plan.

Advanced
21 Mar 2019
Page 295
CAE Inc. Confidential and/or Proprietary Information – see title page

You might also like